JP2017104629A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To clearly convey what kind of benefit is gained by a big winning port and a predetermined winning port when executing a special game.SOLUTION: During execution of a special game, a point performance is executed by a put-out point P1 and a put-out point P2. The put-out point P1 indicates the number of prize balls obtained when game balls enter a first variable winning device or a second variable winning device (a first big winning port or a second big winning port). In addition, the put-out point P2 indicates the number of prize balls obtained when game balls enter a normal winning port (an another hole winning port). Displays corresponding to the put-out point P1 (a first increase performance) and the put-out point P2 (a second increase performance) can be respectively displayed on one display screen.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 83

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, when executing a specific jackpot gaming state (so-called rank-up bonus), the total number of rounds in which the specific jackpot gaming state continues is determined, and the number of rounds is smaller than the total number of rounds. A gaming machine has been disclosed that reports a prescribed number of winnings (20) as an expected number of winnings in an individual period (for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, as another prior art, paying attention to what kind of special gaming state the big hit is a big hit trigger, determine the timing to start counting the number of acquired balls based on the type of big hit, There is known a gaming machine that appropriately obtains the number of acquired balls and informs of this (for example, Patent Document 2).

  Furthermore, as another prior art, when a jackpot game is further executed within a predetermined game range in which a normal gaming state is set after the jackpot game is executed, the accumulated profit stored in the storage unit is There is also a technique of adding unit profits calculated during the jackpot game and storing them in a storage unit (for example, Patent Document 3).

JP 2007-268103 A JP 2010-75436 A JP 2012-34966 A

  The prior art described above has an advantage in that the range of the effects of the gaming machine is widened by devising the way of reporting the profit obtained by the big hit game.

Here, in a general gaming machine, the profit obtained by the jackpot game is notified after the jackpot game ends. This point is also the same for each of the prior arts described above.
In addition, when a game ball enters a big winning opening during a big hit game, a prize ball is obtained each time, so the number of the winning balls may be counted up on a liquid crystal screen or the like. Then, by executing such an acquired profit display effect, the player can grasp how much profit has been obtained so far.

Here, during the big hit game, the game ball mainly enters the big winning opening, but rarely enters the predetermined winning opening (normal winning opening, general winning opening, other hole winning opening). .
In such a case, in one special game, it is possible to obtain a profit that is greater than the profit that can be obtained from the big prize opening.
However, in the conventional display of profit display, the profit obtained by entering a predetermined winning slot is not taken into consideration, so the player knows how much profit was gained through one special game. There is no problem.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a technique capable of clearly communicating to the player what kind of profits are obtained by the special winning opening and the predetermined winning opening when executing the special game. Is an issue.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution is based on a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game related to a game ball flow, and the predetermined lottery is executed. The symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and the symbol display means provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, a variable winning device that opens a special winning opening and executes a special game is arranged around the variable winning device in the game area, and the lottery opportunity It is obtained when the game ball enters the big prize opening during the execution of the special game, and a predetermined winning hole where the game ball may enter regardless of the game state. Large A winning prize profit display effect executing means for executing a winning prize profit display effect for displaying the winning profit by a first numerical image, and a game ball has entered the predetermined winning opening during the execution of the special game. A predetermined winning opening profit display effect executing means for executing a predetermined winning opening profit display effect for displaying a predetermined winning opening profit obtained by the second numerical image different from the first numerical image; is there.

In the gaming machine of this solution, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game related to the flow of game balls (a game ball enters a start winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is performed. Here, the game relating to the flow of the game ball refers to a game based on an operation of causing the player to launch the game ball into a game area partitioned into a predetermined range. In addition, when a lottery opportunity occurs, a predetermined lottery may be executed immediately, but a predetermined lottery may not be executed immediately (for example, during a special game or a change in a symbol).

(2) When the predetermined lottery of (1) above is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. Until next, the next lottery decision is suspended.
Here, the lottery (random number acquisition) trigger and the symbol variation trigger are distinguished. For example, during a special game, even if a lottery trigger occurs, the acquired random number is stored, and the symbol is variably displayed when the start trigger that can vary the symbol is satisfied.

(3) When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific winning manner according to (2) above, the special winning game is opened and the special game is ended in a predetermined end condition (for example, the condition that the final round ends, the ending time ends) The variable winning device for executing until the above condition is satisfied is arranged in a predetermined game area. As a result of the execution of a special game, a lot of winnings (acquisition of prize ball payout) becomes easier than usual regardless of the skill of the player. ) Can be obtained. In addition, special games include not only big hit games as a state transition that makes it easier to make a lot of winnings (acquisition of prize ball payouts) than usual, regardless of the skill of the player. In addition, a state-winning game that lowers the winning rate (for example, a game in which an attacker opens several times over a short period of time) or a small-hit game that changes the winning rate further (without changing the internal winning probability) A game for changing the mode etc. in the production) is also included.

(4) Around the variable winning device of (3) above, a predetermined winning opening (a normal winning opening, which may cause a game ball to enter regardless of the gaming state without generating a lottery opportunity) General winning opening, other hole winning opening) are arranged in a predetermined game area. Here, the term “surrounding” refers to a range in which a game ball launched with the aim of the variable winning device may enter when the variable winning device does not enter.

(5) Grand prize profits gained by the game balls entering the grand prize opening during the execution of the special game (number of prize balls to be paid out, the number of counts entered into the big prize slot, or its entry) The prize winning profit display effect is displayed in which the first numerical image displays the fact that the ball has been achieved and the number of balls acquired per unit.
(6) During the execution of the special game, the predetermined winning opening profit obtained by the game ball entering the predetermined winning opening (the number of the winning balls to be paid out, the number of counts entered into the predetermined winning opening or A predetermined winning opening profit display effect is displayed in which the fact that the winning has been achieved and the number of acquired balls per unit, etc., are displayed by a second number image different from the first number image of (5) above.
The first numeric image and the second numeric image and the design (special design) or the production design corresponding to this design may be arranged and displayed on one display screen. In this case, the player's line of sight can be concentrated at one place on the display screen, so that the ability to concentrate on the game can be improved.

  In this way, according to the present solution, the special winning opening profit display effect and the predetermined winning opening profit display effect are executed during the execution of the special game. It is possible to clearly understand what kind of profits are obtained.

  Here, the profits obtained during the execution of the special game can be collectively displayed without distinguishing between the big winning opening and the predetermined winning opening. However, although such a collective display can grasp the gross profit, there is a concern that it is not possible to know how much of the gross profit is due to the big prize.

In this regard, in this solution, since the profit obtained from the big winning prize and the profit obtained from the predetermined winning prize are clearly distinguished and displayed, the player clearly understands the profit relationship between the two. can do.
In addition, after displaying the second number image (such as the number of balls acquired per unit) and grasping the profit relationship, the predetermined winning opening profit corresponding to the second number image is displayed as the first number image (out of the prize ball payout). You may make it add to (the number of balls).

  In addition, in this solution, since the profit obtained from the big prize opening and the profit obtained from the predetermined prize opening are displayed as numerical images, the display mode is intuitive and easy to understand. It is possible to grasp at a glance what kind of profit has been obtained by the prize winning opening and the predetermined winning prize opening.

  Further, usually, a game ball does not enter so much at a predetermined winning port (other hole winning port), and even if a game ball enters, the player is not so aware of the ball. . For this reason, the conventional predetermined winning opening is positioned as a winning opening having a relatively small presence.

However, in the present solution means, the first numerical image is information relating to profits obtained during a special game taking into account the entry of a game ball launched aiming at such a variable prize device into a predetermined winning opening. Since it is transmitted by another second number image, the existence value of a predetermined winning opening can be increased, and a novel game can be provided.
Note that the special winning opening profit and the predetermined winning opening profit may be a game ball (game medium) paid out from the gaming machine, an electronic storage ball (electronic value medium), or the like. In this way, it is possible to correspond to a circulating (enclosed) gaming machine that may be implemented in the future.
According to the present invention, when a special game is executed, it is possible to clearly communicate to a player what kind of profits have been obtained by the big winning opening and the predetermined winning opening.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of this solution means that each of the big prizes obtained in accordance with the solution 1 each time a game ball enters the big prize opening one by one during execution of the special game. It is possible to accumulate the unit profit and display the first number image according to the integration, and to obtain each time a game ball enters the predetermined winning port one by one during execution of the special game. The predetermined number of winning prizes are accumulated, the second number image corresponding to the accumulation or indicating that the accumulation is being executed can be displayed, and identification of a plurality of unit games repeated by the special game During the execution of the special game including the unit game, or when shifting from the special game to the next game state, the accumulated value of the big prize profit and the accumulated value of the predetermined prize money are added up Combined to display the combined profit display effect that displays the combined profit A game machine, characterized by further comprising a beneficial display demonstration execution unit.

  According to this solution, during the execution of a special game, each winning prize profit (acquisition of winning a prize ball per unit) obtained in response to each game ball entering the winning prize one by one is obtained. The first number image corresponding to the integration (total number of prize balls) can be displayed. In addition, during the execution of the special game, each predetermined winning opening profit (acquisition of the winning ball per unit) obtained in response to each game ball entering the predetermined winning opening one by one is accumulated, It is possible to display a second number image indicating that the integration (total value of the number of prize balls) or that the integration is being executed (processing the total number of prize balls). Then, during the execution of a special game including the time of a specific unit game among a plurality of unit games repeated by the special game, or when transitioning from a special game to the next game state (at the end of a round break such as promotion or promotion) ), The combined profit display effect is displayed to display the combined profit, which is the sum of the accumulated value of the winning prize profit and the accumulated value of the predetermined winning opening profit. In the final stage when the special game is completed while proceeding with the special game while making a distinction, it is possible to grasp all the profits obtained through the special game (the total number of winning prize balls paid out during the special game period).

  Here, the first number image that is an updated display of a dynamic change (for example, a count-up display) according to the change of each winning prize profit (increased winning ball payout) change, and the addition of each predetermined winning prize profit ( (Increase in prize ball payout) When both derivations of the second number image that is an update display of dynamic changes (for example, count-up display) according to changes (when both are displayed), the movement during the special game Since the amount of change display information increases, there is a possibility that the concentration on the game may be hindered in some cases. Therefore, for example, the second number image displayed from the start of operation of the variable winning device until the end of operation is a static informing that the accumulation of each predetermined winning award profit is being executed (during the accumulation process). By making a simple display, it is possible to suppress a decrease in concentration due to the excessive amount of display information described above.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is a transition of the predetermined prize opening profit generated by a game ball flowing down around the variable prize device during execution of the special game in the solution 1 or 2. The game machine further includes a transition display effect executing means for executing a transition display effect for displaying.

  According to this solution, during the execution of a special game including a specific unit game among a plurality of unit games repeated by a special game (until the end or at the round break such as promotion), Since a transition display effect is executed to display the transition of the predetermined prize opening profit obtained by the game ball launched aiming at the variable prize winning device, the player can enter the predetermined prize opening during the special game. It is possible to give an opportunity to look back on the situation after the special game is finished, or to feel that the earned profit is increasing as the special game progresses.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is a game machine according to any one of the solutions 1 to 3, at the start of the special game or a specific unit game among a plurality of unit games repeated by the special game. The gaming machine further comprises an expected profit transmission effect executing means for executing an expected profit transfer effect for transmitting an expected profit that is expected as a result when the special game is played to the end.

  According to this solution, when a special game is played to the end at the start of a special game or a specific unit game among a plurality of unit games repeated by the special game (for example, a variable winning device is Expected profit transmission that conveys the expected profit (the number of counts and the number of balls to be paid out based on at least one of the winning prize openings and the predetermined winning opening) as a result of the operation from the start to the end of the action) Since the effect is executed, when the above-described combined profit display effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the combined profit display effect can be emphasized.

And, when the total profit transmitted by the combined profit display effect is larger than the predicted profit transmitted by the predicted profit transmission effect that is being executed before the special game is ended, It is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player that the expected profit has been exceeded.
Here, as the expected profit, for example, when the theoretical maximum prize ball payout number that can be obtained by one special game or an estimated value related to the maximum count number is to be notified, such maximum prize ball If a value slightly less than the number of payouts or the maximum number of counts (estimated value with high certainty that can be obtained regardless of the player's skill level, etc.) is notified, it will be difficult for the player to be disappointed at the end of the special game. Therefore, it is preferable.
As for the predicted profit, information on the predicted profit can be stored in advance, and the predicted profit can be determined using the information, or the number of special games (number of rounds) and the number of prize balls can be used. The expected profit can be calculated each time.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine of the present solution, in the present solution 4, a winning type defining means for predefining a plurality of winning types including a specific winning type with respect to a result of winning at the predetermined lottery, A winning type determining means for determining which of a plurality of winning types defined by the winning type prescribing means when a winning result is obtained in the predetermined lottery; When the winning type determining means determines that the specified winning type is applicable, the game is shifted to an open state for a predetermined time during which it is easy to generate a ball into the big prize opening, or predetermined within the predetermined time. The special game is executed by performing an opening operation that shifts to an open state until the number of times of entering the grand prize opening occurs, for a predetermined maximum number of times, Is that the special game has been played to the end in the marginal expected profit that is expected as a result when the special game that is determined to be applicable to the specific winning type by the winning type determining means is executed to the end The gaming machine is characterized in that the forecast profit transmission effect is executed in a manner of transmitting a margin excess expected profit, which is a profit including an accompanying profit that is expected to be obtained by the predetermined winning a prize as a case result. .

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) With respect to the winning result obtained by a predetermined lottery, a plurality of winning types including a specific winning type (16 round symbols) are defined in advance.
(2) When a winning result is obtained in a predetermined lottery, it is determined which one of the plurality of winning types defined in (1) above is applicable.

(3) When it is determined that the variable winning device corresponds to the specific winning type (16 round symbols), the variable winning device shifts to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) that facilitates the entry to the big winning opening. Or, a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16 times) is performed for the opening operation to shift to the open state until a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of entering the big winning opening occurs within a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds). As a result, a special game (16 round big hit game) is executed.

(4) The marginal expected profit (16-round profit) that is expected to be obtained as a result when the special game (16-round jackpot game) that is determined to be applicable to the specific winning type is executed to the end. ) Plus extra profits that are expected to be obtained from a predetermined prize opening based on game balls launched with the aim of a variable prize device during special games (gains obtained from other hole prizes). The expected profit transmission effect is executed in a manner of transmitting the expected profit.

  In this solution, since a predetermined winning opening is arranged around the variable winning device, a single big hit game using the variable winning device (special electric accessory) is activated after the variable winning device is activated. It is possible to notify the fact that the game ball has been released exceeding the limit of the released ball (16R × 10 counts × 15 prize balls = 2400 balls). And since an expected profit transmission effect is performed by the aspect which transmits a margin excess expected profit, a player's sense of expectation can be raised significantly.

  Solution 6: The game machine of the present solution is a game board unit in which the game area including the specific area is formed in any one of the solution 1 to 5, and a game ball is launched toward the game area. And a ball launching device that has a passage opening for a game ball that is arranged in the specific area and flows down the specific area, and uses the moving force of the game ball that has entered the passage opening The first discharge port or the specific region that discharges the game balls that have entered the passage port toward the first location of the specific region at a predetermined constant rate by performing a regular operation. And a distribution device that distributes to any one of the second discharge ports that discharge toward the second location, wherein the predetermined winning port is arranged at the first location or downstream thereof, and the variable winning a prize The device is located at the second location or downstream thereof It is a game machine, characterized in that.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A game board unit in which a game area including a specific area (right-handed area) is formed is provided. The game board unit is based on a game board made of plywood or transparent board, and a game area is formed on the front surface thereof. In the game area, obstacle nails, obstacles, electric accessories, winning holes, ornaments and the like are arranged. The specific area may be a left-handed area.

(2) A ball launching device (launching handle) that launches a game ball toward the game area of (1) is provided. When the player operates the ball launching device, the game ball is launched toward the game area, and the game ball flows down the game area. At this time, the game ball that is driven into the specific area of (1) flows down the specific area, and the game ball that is driven into an area other than the specific area of (1) Down the area.

(3) A sorting device is arranged in the specific area of (1). The sorting device has a passage opening through which a game ball flowing down the specific area of (1) enters. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the specific area of (1) is guided to the sorting device through this passage opening. Then, the sorting device performs a regular operation by using the moving force of the game ball that has entered the passage (the power of the game ball, the force of the game ball rolling, the force of the game ball flowing down by its own weight, etc.). Thus, the game balls that have entered the passage port are distributed to either the first discharge port or the second discharge port at a predetermined ratio. The first outlet is an outlet that releases a game ball toward a first location in a specific area, and the second outlet is a release that releases the game ball toward a second location in a specific area. It is an exit. The first location may be the lower left area of the sorting device, and the second location may be the lower right area of the sorting device.

  Here, the sorting device is not a device having an electric driving force, but a device that performs a regular operation using the force of movement of the game ball. For this reason, as compared with a device that performs electrical distribution at a constant period, the distribution of game balls is not influenced by the timing in time, and the certainty of the distribution ratio is improved. Further, the predetermined constant ratio may be the same ratio (for example, a ratio of 1: 1) or an unequal ratio (for example, a ratio of 1: 8, a ratio of 1: 4, etc.). May be.

(4) A predetermined winning opening (normal winning opening, general winning opening, other hole winning opening) is arranged at the first place or downstream thereof.
(5) The variable winning device (special electric accessory) is arranged at the second place or downstream thereof.

  In the present solution, the distribution device distributes the game balls that have entered the passage port to either the first discharge port or the second discharge port at a predetermined fixed ratio, so that the game ball guided to the distribution device Can be released from the first outlet or the second outlet at a constant rate.

  In this way, according to the present solution, the game balls are gathered in the sorting device by interposing the sorting device in the process of the game ball flowing down the specific area, and then the first discharge port or the second release port. Can be distributed to the exit. That is, the regular distribution of the distribution device stabilizes the release destination of the game balls from the distribution device, and as a result, the route of the game balls can be stabilized.

  And according to the board | substrate surface structure of this solution means, since the route | root of a game ball can be stabilized, a game ball stably enters a predetermined winning opening or a variable winning device. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the profit as intended in advance, improve the certainty when the expected profit is transmitted, and also display the predetermined winning opening profit display effect during the special game with high frequency. Can be executed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to clearly communicate to a player what kind of profit has been obtained.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit of a 1st example independently. It is a front view which shows the game board unit of a 2nd example independently. It is a figure which expands and shows the distribution apparatus of the game board unit of a 1st example, and its periphery. It is a figure which expands and shows the distribution apparatus of the game board unit of a 2nd example, and its periphery. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a front view which expands and shows another part of game board unit. It is the perspective view which showed the distribution unit independently (the 1). It is the perspective view which showed the distribution unit independently (the 2). It is the perspective view which showed the distribution mechanism part of the distribution apparatus independently. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a distribution unit in detail (the 1). It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a distribution unit in detail (the 2). It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a distribution unit in detail (the 3). It is the perspective view which showed the front member of the distribution unit independently. It is the perspective view which showed the fixing member of the distribution unit independently. It is the perspective view which showed the rotary body of the distribution apparatus from several angles. It is the perspective view which showed the rotary body and lever member of the distribution apparatus. It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 1) (1/4). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 1) (2/4). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 1) (3/4). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 1) (4/4). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 2) (1/3). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 2) (2/3). It is a figure explaining the principle of operation of a distribution device (the 2) (3/3). It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a figure which shows the open | release operation | movement pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state / special section). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state / special section). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the opening pattern of the big prize opening according to winning design, and the contents of production. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 1" or "9 round symbol 2". It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round symbols". It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) in the case of corresponding to "9 round symbols 1" etc. in a non-time shortening state. It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the expected profit transmission production performed during the change display or stop display of the special symbol (1/7). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the predicted profit transmission effect performed during the change display or stop display of the special symbol (2/7). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the expected profit transmission effect performed during the change display or stop display of the special symbol (3/7). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the expected profit transmission effect performed during the change display of a special symbol, or a stop display (4/7). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the expected profit transmission effect performed during the change display or stop display of the special symbol (5/7). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the expected profit transmission effect performed during the change display or stop display of a special symbol (6/7). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the expected profit transmission effect performed during the change display or stop display of the special symbol (7/7). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of a production of a big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially an example of production of a big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production when it corresponds to "9 round symbols 1" etc. (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of a mistake (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the fireworks rush or the time off (4/4). It is a figure which shows the other variation of an estimated profit transmission pattern. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram (1/4) partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round symbols”. It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of the big role production performed during the big hit game when it corresponds to “16 round symbols” (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of the big role production performed during the big hit game when it corresponds to “16 round symbols” (3/4). FIG. 14 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bodied performance executed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round symbols” (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of a reservation in a fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of shore mode. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the in-memory extended resort determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an expected profit transmission effect management process during a big game. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during operation | movement of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a point production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operating post-process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit). It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, or is changing the symbol, displaying the big hit, or playing the big hit game. It is possible to generate a certain effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.).

  Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). The player can change the contents of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 of the first example alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) The second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, or the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31, distribution device 200 etc. are distributed and installed.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28, the distribution device 200, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is disposed on the right side of the middle start winning port 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is disposed on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 (predetermined winning hole) is arranged in the lower left of the distribution device 200.

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and further, a ball entrance 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the nail. The ball inlet 19a and the outlet 19b are connected by a communication passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the entrance 19a is decelerated and rectified through this communication passage, and is released from the exit 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined entrance) is arranged on the right side of the start gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but enters the out port 19c when it is flipped to the right by the obstacle nail.

  The game balls thrown into the game area 8a enter the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 24, pass through the start gate 20, and the variable start winning apparatus at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a enters the entrance 19a and is released from the exit 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the variable start prize device 28 during operation. There is a possibility of entering a ball, entering a first variable winning device 30 during an opening operation, entering a second variable winning device 31 during an opening operation, or entering a normal winning port 24. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 and the out port 19c are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the right start winning opening 28a (predetermined entrance) (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position retracted from the board surface (a retreat position), making it impossible for the game ball to enter the right start winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) that protrudes to the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a. Note that the variable start winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start winning port by displacing the opening / closing member so as to fall forward with the lower edge portion of the opening / closing member as a hinge.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning) and a predetermined first condition (for example, 6 rounds from the first round) Is activated when the first or the 16th to 16th rounds are satisfied (special electric accessory, first special entry) Event generation means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. Is not possible (the first big prize opening 30b is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is drawn into the board surface, and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the first big winning opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode), and a predetermined second condition (for example, , The seventh round to the ninth round) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second Special entry event generation means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Cannot enter the ball (the second large winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the second large winning port 31b.

  In addition, a guide passage 31 c for guiding a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is disposed inside the second variable winning device 31. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second major winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends to the lower left, and then extends downward again.

  A second count switch 85 is disposed upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a probability variation region blade member 31d and a probability variation region hole 31e are disposed in the middle flow of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is disposed downstream of the air outlet.

  A game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by the second count switch 85 to enter first. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid for operating the probability variation region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so the game ball passes through the upper portion of the probability variation region blade member 31d, It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (no reference sign) is provided in the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation area is an area in which a game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the probability varying region blade member 31d is activated when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which game balls can pass.

  The probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable prize-winning device 31 is released during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the probability variation region blade member 31d is that the production region is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) simultaneously with the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probability variation region is extended for a long time. It is a pattern that is opened for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds). Note that the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term release that is executed simultaneously with the start of the round, and therefore, the game ball is not guided to the probability variation region by this operation. Even if the probability variation area blade member 31d is operated, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area when the second variable winning device 31 is short-circuited.

[Distributor]
A distribution device 200 is arranged between the variable start winning device 28 and the normal winning port 24. Of the game balls that have been hit right, all the game balls that have not entered the active variable start winning device 28 or the out port 19c enter the sorting device 200. Details of the sorting apparatus 200 will be described later.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration of a ship on which three animals are on board). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the game area includes game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the out port 19c. All game balls that have been driven into the 8a are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is a front view showing the game board unit 8-2 of the second example alone. The game board unit 8 of the second example is different from the game board unit 8 of the first example in the following points.

(1) The out port 19c (see FIG. 3) is not arranged on the right side of the start gate 20.
(2) The arrangement position of the variable start winning device 28 is changed from the upper position of the distribution device 200 to the lower position of the middle start winning port 26.
Since other points are the same as those of the game board unit 8 of the first example, description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, in the game board unit 8-2 of the second example, since the variable start winning device 28 and the out port 19c are not arranged upstream of the distribution device 200, all the game balls that have been hit right are distributed. Enter 200.

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the sorting device 200 of the game board unit 8 of the first example and the periphery thereof.
The game balls that have been thrown into the second game area (right-handed area) first enter the entrance 19a, decelerate and rectify through a communication passage (not shown) on the back side, and release one ball at a time from the exit 19b. Is done.

The game ball released from the discharge port 19b follows one of three routes.
The first route is a route in which the game ball released from the discharge port 19b falls directly below without being hit by the obstacle nail directly below (arrow A). The first route is the route through which game balls pass most frequently. In this case, the game ball passes through the obstacle nail, passes through the start gate 20, passes through the front of the variable start winning device 28, and goes to the sorting device 200. However, when the variable start winning device 28 is open, the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 and is collected on the back side of the game board unit.

Even if the first route is being passed, if the ball is bounced to the right by the lower obstacle nail while passing between the obstacle nails (arrow A1), the game ball will move to the second route ( Merge onto arrow B).
In addition, even if the first route is being passed, if the ball is bounced to the left by the lower obstacle nail while passing between the obstacle nails (arrow A2), the game ball moves to the third route ( Merge onto arrow C).

Further, even when the first route is being passed, if the game ball is bounced to the right by the upper end of the variable start winning device 28 (arrow A3), the game ball does not pass through the front of the variable start winning device 28, but is distributed. Head for.
Furthermore, even during the passage of the first route, when the ball is bounced to the left by the upper end portion of the variable start winning device 28 (arrow A4), the game balls join the third route (arrow C).

  The second route is a route in which the game ball released from the discharge port 19b is bounced to the right by the obstacle nail located directly below (arrow B). In this case, the game ball enters the out port 19c and is collected on the back side of the game board unit.

  The third route is a route in which the game ball released from the discharge port 19b is bounced to the left by the obstacle nail located directly below (arrow C). In this case, the game ball goes to the sorting device 200.

  When entering the variable start winning device 28 while passing the first route, or when entering the out port 19c by the second route, in the second game area (right-handed area) of the game ball That's where the flow ends. On the other hand, all other game balls enter the inflow port 200i (passage port) of the sorting apparatus 200.

  Inside the distribution device 200, the game balls are distributed, and the game balls are distributed to the left route (arrow D1) and the right route (arrow D2) at a ratio of 1: 8. For example, if nine game balls flow into the sorting apparatus 200, one game ball passes through the left route (arrow D1), and eight game balls pass through the right route (arrow D2). . Details of the internal structure of the sorting apparatus 200 will be described later.

The game ball passing through the left route (arrow D1) is finally released from the first discharge port 200o1 (first discharge port), and basically enters the normal winning port 24 (arrow D3).
However, when it hits the upper end of the normal winning opening 24 and is bounced to the right (arrow D4), the game ball is guided to the structure where the normal winning opening 24 is arranged and joins the right route (arrow D2). .
Further, when it hits the upper end of the normal winning opening 24 and is bounced to the left (arrow D5), the game ball passes through the left side of the normal winning opening 24 and joins the right route (arrow D2).

  The game ball passing through the right route (arrow D2) is finally discharged from the second discharge port 200o2 (second discharge port) and is guided to the structure in which the normal winning port 24 is arranged, and is second variable. Head to the winning device 31. At this time, if the second variable winning device 31 is open, the gaming ball enters the second variable winning device 31, and if the second variable winning device 31 is not open, the gaming ball is the second variable winning device. Without entering the device 31, it flows downstream as it is.

  According to this board surface configuration, the sorting device 200 enters all of the game balls other than the game balls collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 by entering the out port 19c or the variable start winning device 28 in the process of flowing down the right-handed area. Since the game ball routed to the sorting device 200 varies, the game ball fired to the right-handed area is not limited to the out port 19c or the variable start prize. As long as the ball does not enter the device 28, it is guided to the sorting device 200.

  Then, the sorting device 200 is guided to the sorting device 200 in order to sort the game balls that have entered the inflow port 200i to either the first discharge port 200o1 or the second discharge port 200o2 at a predetermined ratio. The game balls can be discharged from the first outlet 200o1 or the second outlet 200o2 at a constant rate.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the main board, all the games that have not entered the out port 19c or the variable start winning device 28 by interposing the sorting device 200 in the process of the game ball flowing down the right-handed area. The balls can be aggregated in the sorting device 200, where they can be sorted to the first discharge port 200o1 or the second discharge port 200o2, so that the release destination of the game balls from the sort device 200 is stabilized, and as a result, the route of the game balls is stabilized. be able to. Thereby, it becomes easy for the manufacturer of the gaming machine to calculate the rate of game balls, and a stable ball can be provided to the players.

  FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the distribution device 200 of the game board unit 8-2 of the second example and the periphery thereof.

  A game ball that is driven into the second game area (right hit area) first enters the entrance 19a, decelerates and rectifies through a communication passage (not shown) on the back side, and is released from the exit 19b.

The game ball released from the discharge port 19b follows one of three routes.
The first route is a route in which the game ball released from the discharge port 19b falls directly below without being hit by the obstacle nail directly below (arrow A). The first route is the route through which game balls pass most frequently. In this case, the game ball passes through the obstacle nail, passes through the start gate 20, and goes to the sorting device 200.

Even if the first route is being passed, if the ball is bounced to the right by the lower obstacle nail while passing between the obstacle nails (arrow A1), the game ball will move to the second route ( Merge onto arrow B).
In addition, even if the first route is being passed, if the ball is bounced to the left by the lower obstacle nail while passing between the obstacle nails (arrow A2), the game ball moves to the third route ( Merge onto arrow C).

  The second route is a route in which the game ball released from the discharge port 19b is bounced to the right by the obstacle nail located directly below (arrow B). In this case, the game ball goes to the sorting device 200.

  The third route is a route in which the game ball released from the discharge port 19b is bounced to the left by the obstacle nail located directly below (arrow C). In this case, the game ball goes to the sorting device 200.

  In this way, all the game balls that have been driven into the second game area (right-handed area) all enter the inlet 200i (passage opening) of the sorting apparatus 200.

  Inside the distribution device 200, the game balls are distributed, and the game balls are distributed to the left route (arrow D1) and the right route (arrow D2) at a ratio of 1: 8. For example, if nine game balls flow into the sorting apparatus 200, one game ball passes through the left route (arrow D1), and eight game balls pass through the right route (arrow D2). .

The game ball passing through the left route (arrow D1) is finally released from the first discharge port 200o1 (first discharge port), and basically enters the normal winning port 24 (arrow D3).
However, when it hits the upper end of the normal winning opening 24 and is bounced to the right (arrow D4), the game ball is guided to the structure where the normal winning opening 24 is arranged and joins the right route (arrow D2). .
Further, when it hits the upper end of the normal winning opening 24 and is bounced to the left (arrow D5), the game ball passes through the left side of the normal winning opening 24 and joins the right route (arrow D2).

  The game ball passing through the right route (arrow D2) is finally discharged from the second discharge port 200o2 (second discharge port) and is guided to the structure in which the normal winning port 24 is arranged, and is second variable. Head to the winning device 31. At this time, if the second variable winning device 31 is open, the gaming ball enters the second variable winning device 31, and if the second variable winning device 31 is not open, the gaming ball is the second variable winning device. Without entering the device 31, it flows downstream as it is.

  According to this board configuration, since the sorting device 200 has the inflow port 200i into which all the game balls launched into the right-handed area enter, the route of the game balls until reaching the sorting device 200 varies. However, the game ball launched into the right-handed area is always guided to the sorting device 200.

  Then, the sorting device 200 is guided to the sorting device 200 in order to sort the game balls that have entered the inflow port 200i to either the first discharge port 200o1 or the second discharge port 200o2 at a predetermined ratio. The game balls can be discharged from the first outlet 200o1 or the second outlet 200o2 at a constant rate.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the main board, all the game balls are once aggregated in the sorting device 200 by interposing the sorting device 200 in the process in which the game balls flow down the right-handed region, and the first discharge port is provided there. The game balls can be distributed to 200o1 or the second discharge port 200o2, and the release destination of the game balls from the distribution device 200 is stabilized. As a result, the route of the game balls can be stabilized. Thereby, it becomes easy for the manufacturer of the gaming machine to calculate the rate of game balls, and a stable ball can be provided to the players.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, various winning holes are arranged at the lower left place (first place) and the lower right place (second place) of the distribution device 200 to give a profit to the player. Therefore, the player can be provided with a profit as intended in advance by the regular distribution of the distribution device 200.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the ratio of distributing game balls to the first outlet 200o1 and the ratio of distributing game balls to the second outlet 200o2 are different (a ratio of 1 to 8 described later). Compared with the case where game balls are distributed alternately, it is possible to give a bias to the distribution of game balls, to improve the width of the game, and to arbitrarily change the distribution rate.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the sorting device 200 is arranged in the right-hand hit area, it is used in an advantageous gaming state (a big hit state, a small hit state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, etc.). It becomes a device to be. In this way, by limiting the use of the distribution device 200 to devices used in the advantageous game state, the advantage of the distribution device 200 and the advantage in the advantageous game state function synergistically, and the player Can create even more advantageous situations.

  Further, by arranging the sorting device 200 in the right-handed region, it is possible to place the sorting device 200 in a region where it is easier to collect game balls that flow down compared to the left-handed region. That is, since the left-handed region is relatively wide, the game balls are likely to be dispersed, but the right-handed region is often narrower than the left-handed region, so the game balls are not dispersed so much in the flow process. Then, by arranging the sorting device 200 in such a right-handed region, it is possible to make it easier to collect game balls with a stable passage path of game balls.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, unless the game ball is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 in the process of flowing down the right-handed area, the game ball always goes to the first grand prize winning port 30b or the second big prize winning port 31b. In other words, if the first big prize opening 30b or the second big prize opening 31b is in the open state, the game ball will surely enter the first big prize opening 30b or the second big prize opening 31b.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first grand prize winning port 30b or the second grand prize winning port 31b is in the open state, the useless balls are not generated, and the player's expectation is reduced. be able to. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the avoidance hole which avoids that a game ball enters a special winning opening is not formed, the space for forming an avoidance hole can be used for another use.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the slide type attacker (first variable winning device 30 and second variable winning device 31) advantageous for the player is adopted, a situation advantageous for the player is likely to occur. A synergistic effect with the configuration of the distribution device 200 can suppress a decrease in the player's expectation.

  FIG. 7 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 26 every time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one each time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entry. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port 28a. Change to the display mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

  FIG. 8 is an enlarged front view showing another part of the game board unit 8 (a position directly above the second variable winning device 31). Specifically, it is an enlarged front view showing a sorting unit 277 including the sorting device 200 described above.

  The distribution unit 277 provided upstream of the second variable winning device 31 includes a distributing device 200 and a normal winning port 24. The distribution device 200 is a device that distributes the incoming game balls in two directions at a predetermined ratio regardless of the game state. Since the distribution device 200 is attached to the game board 8b and the front side (player side) is formed of a transparent member, the game balls are distributed in one of the two directions inside the distribution device 200. The structure is visible. The normal winning opening 24 is a winning opening provided at a position where a game ball discharged from one discharge port (first discharge port 200o1) of the sorting device 200 is easy to enter. In addition, all game balls discharged from one discharge port (first discharge port 200o1) of the sorting apparatus 200 do not enter (win) the normal winning port 24, and some game balls do not enter. There is also.

  The sorting apparatus 200 includes one inflow port 200i and two discharge ports (first discharge port 200o1 and second discharge port 200o2). Further, a first guiding path 200y1 and a second guiding path 200y2 are provided on the left and right above the inflow port 200i, and the respective guiding paths 200y1 and 200y2 are formed to be inclined toward the inflow port 200i. ing. Therefore, the inflow of the game ball to the inflow port 200i of the sorting device 200 represents that the game ball is intentionally inflowed by the first guide path 200y1 and the second guide path 200y2 provided on the upper left and right of the inflow port 200i. The structure may be such that game balls that flow down the game area 8a randomly flow into the inflow port 200i without providing the guide paths 200y1 and 200y2.

  The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 200i of the sorting device 200 passes through the guide path 200r and is guided to the rotating body 205 provided therein. The game ball guided to the rotating body 205 rotates the rotating body 205 by its own weight, and is distributed to either the first discharge path 200t1 or the second discharge path 200t2 formed in the lower part of the rotating body 205. Here, the first discharge path 200t1 and the second discharge path 200t2 are divided by a partition part 200s, and the shape of the partition part 200s is a convex shape upward, and on the surface inclined on both sides thereof. The structure is such that the game ball that has fallen in the direction is guided in either direction based on the position where it has fallen. Here, the game ball at the time of separating from the rotating body 205 is located from the first discharge path 200t1 or from the second discharge path 200t2. Therefore, the game ball that has been separated from the rotating body 205 and dropped onto the partitioning part 200s is either the first discharge path 200t1 or the second discharge path 200t2 by the partitioning part 200s depending on the state when separating from the rotating body 205. It will be guided to.

  The game ball that is separated from the rotating body 205 and is guided to the first discharge path 200t1 is discharged from the first discharge port 200o1 to the game area 8a, while the game ball that is guided to the second discharge path 200t2 is the second It is discharged from the outlet 200o2 to the game area 8a. As described above, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 200i of the distribution device 200 are distributed in one of two directions, and finally the game area from either the first discharge port 200o1 or the second discharge port 200o2. It will be discharged to 8a.

  In addition, a normal winning opening 24 is provided in the lower part of the distribution device 200, and a third guiding path 200 y 3 and a fourth guiding path 200 y 4 are provided on the left and right sides of the normal winning opening 24. Most of the game balls distributed and discharged to the first discharge port 200o1 by the distribution device 200 enter (win) the normal winning port 24, and the other part of the game balls are placed on the left and right of the normal winning port 24. The game area 8a flows down through the third guide path 200y3 or the fourth guide path 200y4 provided. On the other hand, the game balls distributed and discharged by the distribution device 200 to the second discharge port 200o2 pass through the fourth guide path 200y4 and flow down the game area 8a.

Next, the distribution unit 277 will be specifically described.
9 and 10 are perspective views showing the sorting unit alone. 9 is a perspective view of the sorting unit as seen from the front side (player side), and FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the sorting unit as seen from the back side (inside the gaming machine).

  The distribution unit 277 includes a distribution device 200 that distributes game balls in two directions, and a normal winning opening 24 provided at a lower portion of the distribution device 200, and is attached to an opening provided in the game board 8b. Yes. Specifically, it is attached to the opening of the game board 8b with a screw or the like through the fixing member 203 of the sorting unit 277. Further, a front member 201 is provided on the front side (player side) of the sorting unit 277, and the front member 201 is formed of a transparent resin so that it can be visually seen how the game balls are sorted inside. It has a structure. In addition, the distribution mechanism unit 204 that distributes the game balls flowing in from the inflow port 200i of the distribution device 200 is configured to be stored in the opening of the game board 8b. A specific description of the fixing member 203, the front member 201, and the distribution mechanism unit 204 will be described later.

  In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning opening 24 after flowing into the distribution device 200, being distributed and discharged, pass through a general winning / discharge path 24o formed in the fixed member 203, and then on the board surface. It is collected to the back side. The general winning / discharge path 24o is provided with a rail member 24l so that the game balls that have entered (winned) the normal winning opening 24 are smoothly collected without stagnation inside.

FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the sorting mechanism unit of the sorting apparatus alone.
The distribution mechanism unit 204 of the distribution device 200 includes a rotating body 205, a lever member 207, a spring member 208, and a rear member 209.

  The rotating body 205 of the distribution mechanism unit 204 is rotatably provided with the rotation shaft member 205j as a central axis, and has a structure that rotates by the weight of the game ball. Further, a first side wall portion 205k1 and a second side wall portion 205k2 having openings are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 205, and the structure of the peripheral surface of these side wall portions 205k1 and 205k2 and the rotating body 205 is used. The game balls are distributed. A specific description of the structure of the rotating body 205, the rotating mechanism, and distribution will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  The lever member 207 of the sorting mechanism unit 204 includes an arm unit 207a and a rotating shaft unit 207j, and is provided to be rotatable about the rotating shaft unit 207j. The lever member 207 is interlocked with the rotation of the rotating body 205. The arm portion 207a rotates in a form that is pushed up. A spring member 208 connected to the rear member 209 is provided at the center of the arm portion 207 a of the lever member 207, and the rotation of the lever member 207 is restricted by the spring member 208. Then, the rotation of the rotating body 205 is also controlled in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 207 being controlled. A specific description of the rotation mechanism of the lever member 207 will be described later with reference to another drawing simultaneously with the description of the rotating body 205.

12 to 14 are exploded perspective views showing the configuration of the sorting unit in more detail.
As shown in FIGS. 12 and 14, the distribution unit 277 includes a front member 201, a fixing member 203, and a distribution mechanism unit 204. As shown in FIG. 13, the sorting mechanism unit 204 includes a rotating body 205, a lever member 207, a spring member 208, and a rear member 209.

  Fastening portions 203p, 203q, 203u, 203v, and 203w are formed on the fixing member 203 attached to the game board 8b. The front member 201 is formed with fastening portions 201p, 201q, and 201w. The fastening portions 201p, 201q, and 201w of the front member 201 are fastened by corresponding fastening portions 203p, 203q, and 203w of the fixing member 203 and fastening members (for example, screws) 210p, 210q, and 210w. Further, the rear member 209 is formed with fastening portions 209u and 209v, and the respective fastening portions 209u and 209v correspond to fastening portions 203u and 203v corresponding to the fixing member 203 and fastening members (for example, screws) 210u. , 210v.

  A top cover 203y is formed on the back side of the fixing member 203 (inside the gaming machine). The fixing member 203 and the rear member 209 are fastened and fixed, so that the rotating body 205, the lever member 207, and the spring are formed in the internal space formed by the top cover portion 203y of the fixing member 203 and the rear member 209. The member 208 is provided with a structure.

  In the rear member 209, a total of four storage portions 209f and 209g are formed in pairs facing left and right. The rotary shaft member 205j is stored in the storage portion 209f of the rear member 209, and the rotary shaft portion 207j of the lever member 207 is stored in the storage portion 209g. Note that the fixing member 203 and the rear member 209 are fastened and fixed so that the rotary shaft member 205j and the rotary shaft portion 207j can be rotated and stored in the storage portions 209f and 209g of the rear member 209. The Rukoto. Accordingly, the rotating body 205 is rotatably provided with the rotation shaft member 205j as the central axis, and the lever member 207 is provided rotatably with the rotation shaft portion 207j as the central axis.

  Further, a hook portion 209t is formed at the center of the rear member 209, a hook portion 207t is also formed at the center of the lever member 207, and a spring member 208 is provided between the hook portions 207t and 209t. ing.

  FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing the front member of the sorting unit alone. Specifically, it is a perspective view of the front member 201 as seen from the back side (inside the gaming machine).

  The front member 201 is fastened to the fixing member 203, so that an inflow port 200i through which game balls flow into the sorting device 200 and a guide path 200r are formed downstream of the inflow port 200i. The front member 201 has two symmetrical rib portions 201r on the guide path 200r. Therefore, the game ball that flows in from the inlet 200i and flows down the guide path 200r in the downward direction comes into contact with the rib portion 201r, and the course is changed in the direction of the rotating body 205 provided on the back side (inside the gaming machine). Become.

  Further, a partition portion 200s is formed below the rib portion 201r of the front member 201. Therefore, when the front member 201 is fastened to the fixing member 203, the first discharge path 200t1 and the second discharge path 200t2 are formed via the partition part 200s, and the first discharge port 200o1 and the second discharge port 200o2 are respectively downstream. Will be formed.

  Further, the surface portion 201m of the front member 201 formed of a transparent material is formed to extend below a member that forms the normal winning port 24 located downstream of the first discharge port 200o1 and the second discharge port 200o2. ing. Therefore, in addition to the state of flowing in from the inflow port 200i and being discharged from any of the discharge ports 200o1 and 200o2, the state of flowing down the discharge paths 200t3 and 200t4 and entering the normal winning port 24 (winning). Visible.

  FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the fixing member of the sorting unit alone. Specifically, it is a perspective view of the fixing member 203 viewed from the front side (player side).

  The fixing member 203 is fastened to the front member 201, so that an inflow port 200i that allows the game balls to flow into the sorting device 200 and a second guide path 200y2 that guides the game balls that have flowed down the game area to the inflow port 200i. Is formed. The fixing member 203 is formed with an opening 203k for accommodating the rotating body 205 at a lower position of the inflow port 200i, and a game ball separated from the rotating body 205 is partitioned at a central lower position of the opening 203k. A guide part 203x for guiding to the part 200s is formed.

FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing the rotating body of the sorting apparatus from a plurality of angles.
Specifically, (a) to (i) in FIG. 17 are perspective views of the rotating body 205 viewed from the same direction when the rotating body 205 is rotated at different angles about the rotating shaft member 205j as the central axis. It is. The state shown in FIG. 17A is, for example, a reference state (rotation angle: 0 degree state) when the rotating body 205 is rotated about the rotating shaft member 205j as a central axis. Further, the state shown in FIG. 17B represents a state in which the rotating body 205 is rotated by 40 degrees from the reference state with the rotating shaft member 205j as the central axis. Similarly, the states shown in (c) to (i) of FIG. 17 represent states in which the rotating body 205 is rotated by 40 degrees in the same direction in order with the rotating shaft member 205j as the central axis.

  The peripheral surface of the rotating body 205 is continuously formed with concave portions on which game balls are placed. Specifically, the peripheral surface is divided into nine pieces having the same size, and is viewed from the central axis direction. The cross-sectional shape of each peripheral surface is formed in the same U-shape. Here, each peripheral surface divided into nine parts is referred to as a first peripheral surface 205a to a ninth peripheral surface 205i in order.

  In addition, the end portion of each of the divided peripheral surfaces 205a to 205i of the rotating body 205 is formed so as to protrude along the side surface, and the first side wall portion 205k1 or the second side wall portion 205k2 is formed on either the left or right end portion. Has been. That is, one wall portion (205k1 or 205k2) is formed on one peripheral surface (205a to 205i).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17A to FIG. 17H, a first side wall 205k1 is formed at one end of the first peripheral surface 205a, and similarly, the second peripheral surface 205b A first side wall 205k1 is also formed at the same end of the eighth peripheral surface 205h. On the other hand, as shown to (i) in FIG. 17, the 2nd side wall part 205k2 is formed in the edge part of the reverse direction of the 9th surrounding surface 205i. Therefore, the first side wall portion 205k1 has a structure having an opening at the position of the ninth peripheral surface 205i, and the second side wall portion 205k2 is formed only at the position of the ninth peripheral surface 205i, so This indicates that the structure has an opening at positions of the surface 205a to the eighth peripheral surface 205h.

  Therefore, when a game ball rides on the peripheral surface of the rotator 205, it indicates that the game ball rides in a form that is biased toward either side. For example, when a game ball rides on the first peripheral surface 205a of the rotator 205, the game ball gets leaning toward the opening of the second side wall portion 205k2 in a form obstructed by the first side wall portion 205k1. . Similarly, also when a game ball gets on the 2nd peripheral surface 205b-8th peripheral surface 205h of the rotary body 205, a game ball will lean on the direction of the opening part of the 2nd side wall part 205k2. On the other hand, when a game ball rides on the ninth peripheral surface 205i of the rotator 205, the game ball gets leaning toward the opening of the first side wall portion 205k1 in a form obstructed by the second side wall portion 205k2. .

  Here, regarding the position state where the game ball stays on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 205, the state where the game ball is offset toward the opening of the second side wall portion 205k2 is defined as the second position state, and the first state on the peripheral surface is A state of being offset toward the opening of the side wall 205k1 is defined as a first position state. Then, the game ball rotates in the second position state on the first peripheral surface 205a to the eighth peripheral surface 205h of the rotator 205, and the game ball rotates in the first position state on the ninth peripheral surface 205i of the rotator 205. Represents what to do.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral surface is divided into nine parts, but the number is not limited to nine and may be more or less. Further, although the cross-sectional shape of each peripheral surface is U-shaped, it may be V-shaped or inverted trapezoidal. Further, whether to form the first side wall portion 205k1 or the second side wall portion 205k2 corresponding to one peripheral surface (205a to 205i) may be determined based on a distribution ratio to be performed in the distribution device 200. Good. Specifically, in this embodiment, the side wall portions are formed with respect to each peripheral surface at a ratio of 8 to 1 for all nine surfaces, but at a different ratio (for example, a ratio of 7 to 2) for all nine surfaces. Side wall portions may be formed with respect to each peripheral surface (for example, the first side wall portion 205k1 at the positions of the first peripheral surface 205a to the fourth peripheral surface 205d, the sixth peripheral surface 205f to the eighth peripheral surface 205h, The second side wall 205k2 may be formed at the position of the fifth peripheral surface 205e and the ninth peripheral surface 205i).

FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a rotating body and a lever member of the sorting apparatus.
The cross-sectional shape of the arm portion 207a where the lever member 207 contacts the rotating body 205 is the same as the cross-sectional shape of each peripheral surface (205a to 205i) of the rotating body 205, that is, a U-shape. The lever member 207 has a structure in which the spring member 208 is always pulled toward the rear member 209 side. Therefore, when the rotating body 205 is not rotating (when a game ball is not riding), the arm portion 207a of the lever member 207 is along the U-shape of one of the peripheral surfaces (205a to 205i) of the rotating body 205. Is positioned so that the rotating body 205 and the lever member 207 are positioned in a stable stopped state. On the other hand, when the game ball rides on the rotating body 205 and the rotating body 205 rotates by its own weight, the lever member 207 is lifted. Thereafter, when the game ball is separated from the rotating body 205, the rotating force of the rotating body 205 is reduced, and the lever member 207 is pulled toward the rotating body 205 by the spring member 208, so that the arm portion of the lever member 207 is placed on the circumferential surface of the rotating body 205. The rotation ends at a stable position along 207a.

  Next, the behavior of game balls distributed by the distribution device 200 will be described. 19 to 25 are diagrams for explaining the operation principle of the sorting apparatus 200. Specifically, FIGS. 19 to 22 are diagrams illustrating a first behavior example in which game balls are finally distributed to the first discharge path 200t1 by the distribution device 200, and FIGS. 23 to 25 illustrate the distribution device. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of behavior by which game balls are finally distributed to the 2nd discharge way 200t2 by 200. In the first behavior example, it is assumed that the rotator 205 is stopped in a state of accepting a game ball on the ninth circumferential surface 205i, and in the second behavior example, the rotator 205 is played on the first circumferential surface 205a. It is assumed that the ball is stopped while accepting a ball.

  FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing the entire sorting unit 277, and shows a state in which game balls enter the sorting device 200. 20 and FIG. 23 are perspective views showing the inside of the sorting unit 277, and are views showing a state where the game ball gets on the rotating body 205. FIG. FIG. 21 and FIG. 24 are cross-sectional views centering on the rotator 205 and showing how the game ball rotates on the rotator 205. FIGS. 22 and 25 are perspective views showing the inside of the sorting unit 277, and are diagrams showing a state where the game balls are separated from the rotating body 205 and are sorted by the sorting device 200.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when the game ball flowing down the game area 8a reaches the second guide path 200y2 of the sorting unit 277, the game ball moves on the second guide path 200y2 toward the inflow port 200i. Then, the game ball that has reached the inlet 200i falls into the inlet 200i, that is, enters the sorting device 200 from the inlet 200i. The game ball that has entered the sorting device 200 travels along the guide path 200r in a form of falling.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the game ball traveling (falling) on the guide path 200r comes into contact with the second side wall 205k2 of the rotating body 205, and the traveling direction is changed by the second side wall 205k2. That is, the path is changed to the path on the ninth peripheral surface 205i of the rotating body 205 and directed to the opening (first position state) of the first side wall 205k1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game ball traveling (falling) on the guide path 200r is a rib portion formed on the front member 201 in addition to the second side wall portion 205k2 of the rotating body 205. The advancing direction is changed by the rib portion 201r. That is, the game ball travels on the rib portion 201r and is changed to a course toward the rotating body 205.

  Therefore, the game ball traveling (falling) on the guide path 200r is located on the ninth peripheral surface 205i of the rotating body 205 by the second side wall portion 205k2 of the rotating body 205 and the rib portion 201r of the front member 201. It will head toward the opening (first position state) of the side wall 205k1.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, the game ball rides on the ninth peripheral surface 205 i of the rotating body 205 by the second side wall portion 205 k 2 of the rotating body 205 and the rib portion 201 r of the front member 201. Although not shown, the position of the game ball riding on the ninth peripheral surface 205i is positioned in a state of being offset toward the opening of the first side wall portion 205k1 (first position state).

  As shown in FIG. 21C, the rotating body 205 starts to rotate about the rotation shaft member 205j as a central axis by the weight of the game ball. In the illustrated example, the rotating body 205 is shown rotating about 10 degrees. When the rotating body 205 rotates due to the weight of the game ball, the game ball is displaced downward while being sandwiched between the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 and the ninth peripheral surface 205i of the rotating body 205. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 205, the arm portion 207 a of the lever member 207 is lifted by the rotating body 205. Although not shown in the drawing, the position of the game ball when rotating on the ninth peripheral surface 205i is determined by the second side wall portion 205k2 formed on the ninth peripheral surface 205i. It will be located in the state (first position state) offset toward the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 21D, when the rotating body 205 further rotates about 10 degrees (about 20 degrees in total from the start of rotation), the game ball moves between the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 and the ninth round of the rotating body 205. In a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces 205i, it is further displaced downward. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 205, the arm portion 207 a of the lever member 207 is further lifted by the rotating body 205.

  As shown in FIG. 21E, when the rotating body 205 further rotates about 10 degrees (about 30 degrees in total from the start of rotation), the game ball moves from the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 to the ninth round of the rotating body 205. In a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces 205i, it is further displaced downward. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 205, the arm portion 207a of the lever member 207 is maintained in a state where it is lifted by the rotating body 205.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (F), when the rotating body 205 further rotates about 10 degrees by the weight of the game ball, that is, when the total rotation of about 40 degrees from the start of rotation, The state sandwiched between the ninth circumferential surface 205 i and the rib portion 201 r of the front member 201 is eliminated, and the ninth circumferential surface 205 i of the rotating body 205 is separated from the upper surface. Then, the game ball rides on the guide portion 203x formed on the fixing member 203 and is then guided to the partition portion 200s. Although not shown, the position of the game ball when the game ball rides on the guide portion 203x is the opening of the first side wall portion 205k1 by the second side wall portion 205k2 formed on the ninth peripheral surface 205i. It will be located in the state (1st position state) which deviated toward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21F, when the game ball is separated from the rotating body 205, the rotational force of the rotating body 205 that has been rotated by its own weight is lost. The pulling force of the spring member 208 acts on the rotating body 205 that is rotating even when the game balls are separated from each other through the lever member 207. Therefore, after a while, the arm portion 207a of the lever member 207 is moved to the rotating body 205. The rotating body 205 stops in a stable state along the peripheral surface. Therefore, when the distribution on the ninth peripheral surface 205i of the rotating body 205 is completed, it is next stopped in a state where a game ball is received on the first peripheral surface 205a, and the next game ball can be distributed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the game ball separated from the rotating body 205 flows down from above the guide portion 203x. Here, the shape of the partition portion 200s is convex upward, and specifically, the partition portion 200s has a surface inclined toward the first discharge path 200t1 and toward the second discharge path 200t2. An inclined surface is formed, and the structure is such that a game ball flows down on either surface. In this example, since the game ball is located on the guide portion 203x in a state of being offset toward the opening of the first side wall portion 205k1 (first position state), the game ball is directed toward the first discharge path 200t1 of the partition portion 200s. The game ball will flow down on the inclined surface. Then, the game ball guided to the first discharge path 200t1 by the partition part 200s proceeds through the first discharge path 200t1 and is finally discharged from the first discharge port 200o1.

  The game ball discharged from the first discharge port 200o1 of the distribution device 200 has the following behavior depending on the traveling direction of the game ball when discharged from the first discharge port 200o1 and the position discharged from the first discharge port 200o1. Is different. For example, when a game ball is discharged from the vicinity of the center of the first discharge port 200o1 in a substantially downward direction, the normal winning port 24 is entered (winned). On the other hand, when it is not directed downward or is discharged from a position that is not near the center of the first outlet 200o1, it does not enter the normal winning hole 24 and is rebounded to the wall of the normal winning hole 24, etc. Then, the vehicle proceeds to the third taxiway 200y3 and the fourth taxiway 200y4.

  Next, a description will be given of a second behavior example of the game ball distributed by the distribution device 200 when the rotating body 205 is stopped in a state of receiving the game ball on the first peripheral surface 205a.

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the game ball flowing down the game area 8a reaches the second guide path 200y2 of the sorting unit 277, it moves on the second guide path 200y2 toward the inflow port 200i. Then, the game ball that has reached the inlet 200i falls into the inlet 200i, that is, enters the sorting device 200 from the inlet 200i. The game ball that has entered the sorting device 200 travels along the guide path 200r in a form of falling. Then, the game ball traveling (falling) on the guide path 200r abuts on the first side wall 205k1 of the rotating body 205, and the traveling direction is changed by the first side wall 205k1. That is, the path is changed to the path on the first peripheral surface 205a of the rotating body 205 and toward the opening (second position state) of the second side wall 205k2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, the game ball traveling (falling) in the guide path 200r is a rib portion formed on the front member 201 in addition to the first side wall portion 205k1 of the rotating body 205. The advancing direction is changed by the rib portion 201r. That is, the game ball travels on the rib portion 201r and is changed to a course toward the rotating body 205.

  Accordingly, the game ball traveling (falling) on the guide path 200r is second on the first peripheral surface 205a of the rotating body 205 by the first side wall portion 205k1 of the rotating body 205 and the rib portion 201r of the front member 201. It will go to the opening part (2nd position state) of the side wall part 205k2.

  As shown in FIG. 24B, the game ball rides on the first peripheral surface 205a of the rotating body 205 by the first side wall portion 205k1 of the rotating body 205 and the rib portion 201r of the front member 201. Although not shown, the position of the game ball riding on the first peripheral surface 205a is located in a state of being offset toward the opening of the second side wall portion 205k2 (second position state).

  As shown in FIG. 24C, the rotating body 205 starts to rotate about the rotation shaft member 205j as the center axis by the dead weight of the game ball. In the illustrated example, the rotating body 205 is shown rotating about 10 degrees. When the rotating body 205 rotates due to the weight of the game ball, the game ball is displaced downward while being sandwiched between the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 and the first peripheral surface 205a of the rotating body 205. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 205, the arm portion 207 a of the lever member 207 is lifted by the rotating body 205. Although not shown in the drawing, the position of the game ball when rotating on the first peripheral surface 205a is determined by the first side wall portion 205k1 formed on the first peripheral surface 205a. It will be located in the state where it deviated toward the opening (second position state).

  As shown in FIG. 24D, when the rotating body 205 further rotates about 10 degrees (about 20 degrees in total from the start of rotation), the game ball moves between the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 and the first round of the rotating body 205. It will be displaced further downward while being sandwiched between the surfaces 205a. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 205, the arm portion 207 a of the lever member 207 is further lifted by the rotating body 205.

  As shown in FIG. 24E, when the rotator 205 further rotates about 10 degrees (about 30 degrees in total from the start of rotation), the game ball moves between the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 and the first round of the rotator 205. It will be displaced further downward while being sandwiched between the surfaces 205a. In conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 205, the arm portion 207a of the lever member 207 is maintained in a state where it is lifted by the rotating body 205.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24F, when the rotating body 205 further rotates by about 10 degrees due to the weight of the game ball, that is, when the rotating body rotates about 40 degrees from the start of the rotation, The state sandwiched between the first circumferential surface 205a and the rib portion 201r of the front member 201 is eliminated, and the first circumferential surface 205a of the rotating body 205 is separated from the first circumferential surface 205a. Then, the game ball rides on the guide portion 203x formed on the fixing member 203 and is then guided to the partition portion 200s. Although not shown, the position of the game ball when the game ball rides on the guide portion 203x is the opening of the second side wall portion 205k2 by the first side wall portion 205k1 formed on the first peripheral surface 205a. It will be located in the state (2nd position state) which deviated toward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24F, when the game ball is separated from the rotator 205, the rotational force of the rotator 205 rotated by its own weight is lost. The pulling force of the spring member 208 acts on the rotating body 205 that is rotating even when the game balls are separated from each other through the lever member 207. Therefore, after a while, the arm portion 207a of the lever member 207 is moved to the rotating body 205. The rotating body 205 stops in a stable state along the peripheral surface. Therefore, when the distribution on the first peripheral surface 205a of the rotating body 205 is completed, the second peripheral surface 205b then stops in a state of accepting a game ball, and the next game ball can be distributed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the game ball separated from the rotating body 205 flows down from above the guide portion 203x. Here, the shape of the partition portion 200s is convex upward, and specifically, the partition portion 200s has a surface inclined toward the first discharge path 200t1 and toward the second discharge path 200t2. An inclined surface is formed, and the structure is such that a game ball flows down on either surface. In this example, since the game ball is located on the guide portion 203x in a state of being offset toward the opening of the second side wall portion 205k2 (second position state), the game ball is directed toward the second discharge path 200t2 of the partition portion 200s. The game ball will flow down on the inclined surface. Then, the game ball guided to the second discharge path 200t2 by the partition portion 200s proceeds through the second discharge path 200t2 and is finally discharged from the second discharge port 200o2.

  The game ball discharged from the second discharge port 200o2 of the sorting apparatus 200 will travel to the fourth guide path 200y4. In addition, a special member is formed on the fourth guiding path 200y4 side of the normal winning opening 24, and when the game ball falls on the special member, the path of the game ball is changed from right below to the right. The game area 8a is made to flow down.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the probability variation area switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area disposed inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

  Similarly, the game board unit 8 includes a first winning port switch 86 for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 22 and a second winning port switch for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 24. 81 is equipped. In addition, although the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is given as an example for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game balls for the respective normal winning openings 22 are arranged. Incoming balls may be detected individually.

  In any case, winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In this embodiment, the game board unit 8 has a gate switch 78, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, a first winning port switch 86, a second winning port switch 81, and a probability changing area switch 95. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening corresponding to the upstream of the probability changing region, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second big prize opening solenoid 97, and a probability changing area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively ( Actuating) or moving the probability variation region blade member 31d. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. In addition, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  27 and 28 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 28 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, the probability changing area solenoid 99, etc. The entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 30). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 is the same as another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 30). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed for the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 30). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 performs the test signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 as described above. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the terminal or command control signal.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 27).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and the probability changing area switch 95, a middle start winning port switch 80, a right starting winning port switch 82, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, a first winning port. The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81 is read.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of winning balls. Output a ball command.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 30).

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 drives each of the drive signals of the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, the second large prize opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer, and the test. Output the port with the signal etc.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 30). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the probability changing area switch 95 corresponding to the probability changing area provided in the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes the process at the time of passing through the probability changing region. As the process at the time of passing through the probability changing area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag in the flag region of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means) ). The probability variation function operation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. Further, as the process at the time of passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability variation area passing command. The probability variation area passing command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 30). The main control CPU 72 may execute the process at the time of passing through the probability variation area only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the solenoid 99 for the probability variation area is operated during the big hit game). On the other hand, if no detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 30).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 31). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 30).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 31).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 31). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 32), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 30) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 32) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 32) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 32) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 32) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 31).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an acquisition effect determination process. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 32, step S46 in FIG. 33) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 32) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 33). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of the above-described loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process after executing the determination result management process in step S82, and the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 32) or the second special symbol. The process returns to the storage update process (FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random number stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this will be displayed in the “probable variable region passable symbol (9 round symbol 2, 16 round symbol)” If applicable, for example, “A0H” is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 32) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 33). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and from the result, as the jackpot type, “probability variation region passage difficult symbol (9 round symbol 1)” or “probability variation region passage symbol (9 round symbol 2) , 16 round symbols) ”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value indicates “probable change region passable symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, “01H” is set as the special symbol destination determination value when it corresponds to “probability variation region difficult passage symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probability variation region passage symbol”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 32) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 33).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner of 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win time variable winning device management process, the first big winning port solenoid 90 is continuously operated for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or until ten game balls are counted). The first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second large prize opening solenoid 97 is set in advance for a certain period of time (for example, until 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls are counted). Thus, the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). Furthermore, when the 16 round big hit is true, after the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31, the first big prize opening solenoid 90 counts for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 10 game balls entered). The first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern by being excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times) (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically.

  In the present embodiment, as the first opening / closing operation pattern, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the sixth round, and the second variable winning device 31 is operated from the seventh round to the ninth round. An operation pattern in which the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened / closed from the 10th round to the 16th round can be employed. In the present embodiment, as the second opening / closing operation pattern, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed in the odd-numbered rounds (first round, third round, etc.), and the even-numbered rounds (second round, fourth round). Etc.), an operation pattern for opening and closing the second variable winning device 31 can be adopted. Furthermore, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 9 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits, but for 16 round big hits and 9 round big hits, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 30). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but the first big prize opening is almost generated. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the “16 round jackpot”, for example, only (1) “16 round jackpot” is provided as a plurality of winning types. In addition to “16 round symbol jackpot”, (2) “9 round jackpot 1” and (3) “9 round jackpot 2” are provided as a plurality of winning types. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 16 rounds and 9 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round symbols”, “9 round jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “9 round symbols 1”, “9 round jackpot 2” corresponds to “9 round jackpot 2” Corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[Opening pattern of variable winning device (Part 1)]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the special winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol and the opening of the probability variation area will be described.

[9 round symbols 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbols 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), which is 5 rounds. Continue to eyes. In the sixth round, the first grand prize opening is opened four times in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the sixth round of the “9-round symbol 1” jackpot game is completed without giving the player a substantial ball (prize ball). In addition, in the seventh to ninth rounds, the second grand prize opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once each in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. To do. Therefore, the seventh to ninth rounds of the jackpot game of “9 round symbol 1” are finished without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, in the “9 round symbol 1” jackpot game, approximately 5 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. If it falls under “9 round symbols 1”, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends, A privilege to shift to the “shortened state” is given to the player. In addition, in the big hit game of “9 round symbol 1”, the second grand prize opening is opened from the seventh round to the ninth round, but the opening time of the second big prize opening is extremely short (for example, the start of the round) Therefore, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area. Note that the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. The Similarly, the second grand prize winning port of the second variable prize winning device 31 similarly does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. Closed.

[9 round symbols 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “9 round symbol 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). . In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), which is 5 rounds. Continue to eyes. In the sixth round, the first grand prize opening is opened four times in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than the first to fifth rounds. Therefore, the sixth round of the “9-round symbol 2” jackpot game is completed without giving the player a substantial appearance (prize ball). Also, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened for a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). Is performed once. Furthermore, in the 8th and 9th rounds, the second big prize opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once in a shorter time (for example, 0.1 second) than in the 7th round. For this reason, in the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, approximately 6 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. However, in the seventh round of the “9 round symbol 2” jackpot game, the opening time of the second grand prize opening is set to a long time (for example, 29 seconds from the start of the round), so that the game ball has a probability variation area. There is a possibility of passing. In the “9-round symbol 2” jackpot game, the second grand prize opening opens at the 8th and 9th rounds, but the opening time of the second grand prize opening is extremely short (for example, the start of the round) Therefore, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the seventh round in the case of “9 round symbol 2”, the “probability” is reached after the end of the big hit game. The “variable function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if it falls under “9 round symbol 2”, regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

[16 round designs]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16 round symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display processing described above, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is 6 rounds. Continue to eyes. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the seventh round, and this is the ninth round. Continue until. Thereafter, the first grand prize winning opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 10th round, and this is the 16th round. Continue until. For this reason, in the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, approximately 16 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. Here, in the 7th to 9th rounds of the “16 round symbol” jackpot game, the opening time of the second big prize opening is set to a long time (for example, 29 seconds from the start of the round). May pass through the probability variation region.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 between the 7th and 9th rounds in the case of “16 round symbols”, the big hit game After the end of, the “probability changing function” is activated, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player.

  Furthermore, if the “16 round symbol” is applicable, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, By operating the “time reduction function”, a privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” is given to the player.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under any of the above “9-round symbol 2” or “16-round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability changing area during the big hit game, the internal state is reached after the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege of shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”. In addition, in the “high probability time reduction state”, an internal lottery is won, the winning symbol at that time corresponds to either “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, and the game ball is played during the big hit game If the probability variation area is passed, the “high probability time shortened state” is continued (restarted) even after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above “9 round symbol 1”, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, so the internal state shifts to the “low probability time shortened state” after the big hit game ends. To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to either “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” above, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the internal state will be Transition to “low probability time state”.

  In the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common “1.5 seconds”. The interval time between rounds is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). Game) to be executed. In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), there is hardly any winning in the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 30). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this processing, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value from the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and subtracts it. The later value is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 30). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 30).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds) Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are fluctuation times that are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state / special section) during loss.
This selection table is a special section in a high probability time shortening state, and is a table used when a non-winning state is satisfied (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, a special area is an area until it changes a special symbol 4 times after shifting to a high probability time shortening state.

  Here, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation in the special section of the high probability time shortening state is set to the same fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time is about 2 seconds, for example) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation. In the table configuration, one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern 50) is selected.

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach fluctuation pattern 50 is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[Refer to Fig. 37: Pre-processing for special symbol changes]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are roughly three types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types are “9-round symbol 1”, “9-round symbol 2”, and “16-round symbol”. Each of the three types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 1a”, “9 round symbol 1b”, “9 round symbol 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each allocation value “50”, “45”, “5” is set to 100. Corresponds to the ratio of cases. In the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “9 round symbol 1” is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting “9 round symbol 2” is 100 minutes. The ratio of “16 round symbols” is 5/100 (= 5%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “9 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, if the game ball corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “20” and “80” is the case where the denominator is 100. It corresponds to the ratio. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “9 round symbol 2” is 20/100 (= 20%), and the rate of selecting “16 round symbol” is 100. 80 minutes (= 80%). In the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, a distribution value for “9 round symbol 1” is not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “02H” and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H03H”.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. However, if the game ball corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state” or the “low probability time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a higher frequency compared to the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated). The operation memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the operation memory for the first special symbol. In this case, if the selection ratio of “16 round symbols” is increased for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win the “16 round symbols” than usual, so that it is possible to increase the player's profit accordingly. There is.

[Refer to Fig. 37: Pre-processing for special symbol changes]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 9 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “reach effects” are defined, and in the case of 9 round big hit or 16 round big hit, any one of them is selected. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished for the 9-round big hit and the 16-round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state / special section).
This selection table is a table used when a big hit is won in a special section with a high probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). As described above, the special section is a section from when the special symbol is changed four times after the transition to the high probability time shortening state.

  Here, the variation pattern at the time of winning in the special section of the high probability time shortening state is all the same variation pattern (the variation time is about 10.0 seconds, for example) in order to secure a dramatic measure for a big hit. This selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern 120).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “120” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The fluctuation pattern 120 per non-reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[Refer to Fig. 37: Pre-processing for special symbol changes]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects any one of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol” as the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410. In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is only one type of “one-time small hit symbol”. However, other types such as “twice open small hit symbol” and “three open small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 35: Special symbol changing process, special symbol stop display process]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 37). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 37), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest one of the existing working memories corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, when the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 The process proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, if the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (Step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. . The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 37).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 35) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, a value corresponding to “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”, a value representing “9 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 37). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round symbols”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “9 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In the present embodiment, since the so-called frequency cut probability changing function is adopted, when shifting to the “high probability time reduction state”, the frequency cut counter relating to the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), The turn-off counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times). In addition, in the case of shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the number cut counter relating to the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”, the count-off counter regarding the high probability state and the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), These are a probability variation function operation flag and a time reduction function operation flag. In addition, when shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the count-down counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times), so only the time shortening function operation flag is reset. is there. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 30) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “9 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “9 rounds (9R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot gaming process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a big hit big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. The number of wins) and the operation pattern of the probability changing area solenoid 99 are selected. The winning pattern opening pattern for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the probability changing area solenoid 99, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during the opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). But not very difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 37). Specifically, if the large category “16 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. If “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to nine. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“8” for 9 times, “15” for 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the big hit opening timer and the probability change area timer (the probability change area release time) based on the big winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability change area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer). The timer value set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or the opening time of the probability changing area. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer and the probability change area timer, the release time is set to enter the big prize opening or the probability change during one release. This is a sufficient time (for example, a time when 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more) when the region passes easily. On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer and the probability change area timer, the release time is not incapable of entering the big prize opening or passing through the probability change area during one release. In both cases, it is a short time that hardly occurs (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launch control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the big hit interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (probability variation region temporarily based on the large winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set the timer to count the waiting time for closing. The timer value set here is a waiting time between rounds of big hit or a temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win time big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the big win time variable winning device management processing (FIG. 51).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening / closing operation process for a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big prize winning interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the big prize opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the big prize opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the big prize winning interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the big prize opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 52) is executed.

  Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the probability variation area interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the probability variation area interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

  Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes probability variation area release processing. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 52) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5307a. Execute.

  Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation area release time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability change area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5308. Run.

  On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

  Step S5307b: Probability change area closing processing is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the special winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5312. Run.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 shifts from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 31d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region disposed inside the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability changing area interval timer set in the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 52).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the big prize opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the big prize opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 51) for the big hit. Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big prize winning interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 31 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In this embodiment, for example, such an open pattern is adopted in the sixth round when it corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”, but from the first round when it corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”. Up to the fifth round, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Accordingly, since the counter value reaches the number of times set by one opening / closing operation (Yes) in the first to fifth rounds in the case of “16 round symbol 1”, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322. It will be.

  On the other hand, the sixth round in the case of “16 round symbol 1” adopts a pattern in which the opening / closing operation is repeated a plurality of times within one round, so the counter value is still set to the number of times set at the end of one opening. It will not be reached (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize closing closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 51), the main control CPU 72 performs the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (9 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 51).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event process (step S28 in FIG. 31).

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 170 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set for the high probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state, and the state may return to the low probability state (so-called frequency cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 37) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which number of shortening times is set depends on the value of the probability variation function activation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag must be set. For example, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “time reduction in progress”. Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 35) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, two based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and in such an open time, most of the winnings at the big prize opening occur during one open. No (becomes difficult) short time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers to an open state from a closed state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 57) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 57).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 56). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 57). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 56).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 56), the small jump time big prize opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination. Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module, and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 56).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 35) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

  FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the winning pattern opening pattern and effect contents for each winning symbol. Hereinafter, a description will be given along a time series.

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 1]
In FIG. 61, (A): From the first round to the fifth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated five times, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed five times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 5th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. In the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid are repeated four times in a short period during the round, and the first variable winning device 30 repeats opening and closing four times. The sixth round is a short opening (0.1 second opening is 4 times).

  In FIG. 61 (B): From the seventh round to the ninth round, ON and OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 97 are repeated three times in a short period, and the second variable prize winning device 31 opens and closes three times. Repeat once. From the 7th round to the 9th round, a short is opened (0.1 second is opened).

  In FIG. 61 (C): As the contents of the effect, the battle effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, the defeat effect is executed in the sixth round, and the defeat effect is continued in the seventh to ninth rounds. .

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 2]
In FIG. 61 (D): From the first round to the fifth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated five times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 opens and closes five times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 5th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. In the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid are repeated four times in a short period during the round, and the first variable winning device 30 repeats opening and closing four times. The sixth round is a short opening (0.1 second opening is 4 times).

  In FIG. 61, (E): In the seventh round, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is turned on and off once, and the second variable prize winning device 31 opens and closes once. The seventh round is long open (29 seconds open). In the 8th and 9th rounds, ON and OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 97 are repeated twice in a short period, and the second variable prize winning device 31 repeats opening and closing twice. The eighth and ninth rounds are short open (0.1 second open).

  In FIG. 61 (F): As for the contents of the effect, a battle effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round, and a V prize-related effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. Is done. In the V prize-related effect, when the game ball passes the probability variation area, an effect is transmitted to the player that the V prize has occurred, and when the game ball does not pass the probability variation area, the V An effect of transmitting to the player that no winning has occurred is executed.

[At the time of winning 9 round symbols 2]
In FIG. 61 (G): From the first round to the sixth round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated six times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 opens and closes six times. repeat. From the 1st round to the 6th round, a long opening (29 seconds opening) is performed. Further, from the 10th round to the 16th round, ON and OFF of the first big prize opening solenoid 90 are alternately repeated seven times, and the first variable prize winning device 30 repeats opening and closing seven times. The 10th to 16th rounds are long open (29 seconds open).

  In FIG. 61 (H): From the seventh round to the ninth round, the second large prize opening solenoid 97 is alternately turned on and off three times, and the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened and closed three times. repeat. From the 7th round to the 9th round, long open (29 seconds open).

  In FIG. 61, (I): As the contents of the effect, a big role effect dedicated to the 16th round jackpot is executed from the 1st round to the 16th round. For the seventh to ninth rounds during the big role production, the above V prize-related production can be executed.

  Although the operation timing of the probability variation region solenoid 99 is not particularly illustrated, it operates when the second variable winning device 31 operates.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a game flow that is developed in the case of “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In normal mode, when [F2] “9 round symbol 1” is a big win, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F4] is defeated in the battle of the big role [F5] Transition to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the coast mode, when the winning result is not obtained, [F6] When the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when [F7] “9 round symbol 2” big win is won, [F3] 9 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] wins the battle of the big role effect.

  [F9] When the game ball passes the probability variation area in the seventh round of the 9th round jackpot game (when winning V), [F10] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred is executed, and [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

  [F11] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state. [F11] If the result of winning is not obtained in the fireworks rush and [F12] special symbols fluctuate 170 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, if [F13] corresponds to the 9th round symbol 2, but the game ball does not pass the probability variation area in the seventh round of the big hit game (if V is not won), [F10] V win does not occur The effect which shows this is performed, and it transfers to [F5] coast mode.

  [F5] When the coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush hits a 16-round symbol jackpot, a 16-round jackpot game is executed. If the game ball passes the probability change area in the 7th to 9th rounds of the 16 round jackpot game, the game moves to [F11] fireworks rush, and the game balls in the 7th to 9th rounds of the 16 round jackpot game. Does not pass through the probability variation area, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed when the “16 round symbols” are met.
[G1] 16-round jackpot game (special bonus) will be executed when [G1] “16-round symbol” is won in either [F1] normal mode, [F5] coast mode, or [F11] fireworks rush .

  [G3] When the game ball passes through the probability variation area in any of the seventh round to the ninth round of the 16 round big hit game (when winning V), [G4] an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred. Is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, [F11] fireworks rush is entered.

On the other hand, although [G5] corresponds to the 16-round symbol, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in any of the seventh to ninth rounds of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won), [G6 ] An effect indicating that no V winning has occurred is executed, and after the big hit game ends, [F5] shifts to the coast mode.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 64 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
64 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, in order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (◯), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 64, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (in broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is “9 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
64 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
(C) in FIG. 64: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “8” is stopped at the left position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 64, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 64, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 64 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 64: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 65 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of “9 round symbol 1”, “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” in the non-time shortened state. It is. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effects are, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2” ( For example, it is executed until the 7 segment LED is stopped and displayed at “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) (reach) Production execution means). In addition, in FIG. 65, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
65 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
65 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 65 (C): after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change in the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 65 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 65 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 65 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expectation level of the big hit in “9 round symbol 2” will be high, so not only the success or failure of the lottery, but also “ Players can have a variety of tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 65, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for a while, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group and passes through the screen diagonally. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 65 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 65 (H): When the reach production is nearing the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it was split into a large copy and the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased, and if the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end, it is a big hit” ”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “the jackpot may be close soon” can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 65 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to either “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”. However, for example, “5” ”Is displayed in the center of the screen so that the player is informed that the game has fallen into“ 9 round symbol 1 ”or“ 9 round symbol 2 ”this time. .

  In FIG. 65 (J): For example, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been determined on the effect. In other words, by making an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is not disclosed to the player that “I won in 9 round symbol 1 or 9 round symbol 2” I can leave.

  In addition, when it corresponds to "9 round symbol 2", the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “9 round symbol 2” corresponds internally, an even number of effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and an effect symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed by re-variation (for example, a re-lottery effect). It is possible to execute an effect that clearly teaches that it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Expected profit transmission effect]
FIG. 66 to FIG. 71 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the effect of the expected profit transmission effect executed during the special symbol variation display or the stop display.
Here, “Expected Profit Propagation Effect” means that when a winning result is obtained in a special symbol lottery, or when a game is performed during the execution of a big hit game while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable or stopped display It is an effect that conveys the expected profits that are expected as actual results. Hereinafter, the expected profit transmission effect executed in conjunction with the reach effect will be described.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 66 (A): In synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the column of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled vertically on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started. Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color. The background image is a “normal mode” background image in which a female character sits on a chaise lounge.

[Stage progress notice effect (first stage)]
66 (B): Next, during the execution of the variable display effect, the first stage advance notice effect (pre-reach notice effect) using the female character's pattern image (reference numeral SU1) is performed. This stage advance notice effect is a notice effect in which a change in mode progresses step by step from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this stage advance notice effect is displayed in such a manner that it suddenly appears at the corner position of the liquid crystal screen. Note that the “stage advance notice effect” here is a notice effect with content that suggests that there is a possibility that the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed in a winning manner according to the progress of the effect.

[Stage progress notice effect (2nd stage)]
In FIG. 66 (C): the stage advance notice effect of the second stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the first stage. In the illustrated example, another female character SU2 additionally appears from the lower right position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female character SU1 that has been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (3rd stage)]
In FIG. 67 (D): The stage advance notice effect at the third stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect at the second stage. In the illustrated example, the third female character SU3 additionally appears from the upper left position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 and SU2 that have been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (4th stage)]
67 (E): The stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the third stage. In the illustrated example, a fourth female character SU4 additionally appears from the upper right position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU3 displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (5th stage)]
67 (F): The stage advance notice effect of the fifth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage. In the example shown in the figure, the fifth female character SU5 appears as a close-up at the center position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU4 displayed previously. At this time, the left effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 68 (G): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed thereafter. At this time, the right effect design representing the number “3” is stopped and displayed at the right position of the screen. When the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed, a reach state of the numbers “3”-“being changed”-“3” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 68, (H): After a reach state has occurred, images representing animal characters (eg, white bears) form a group and pass through the screen from right to left on the screen after the reach occurrence (group notice) Production). This group notice effect is an effect with a higher expectation level for the big hit than the group notice effect using the heart image described above.

[Super reach production]
In FIG. 68, (I): The reach state continues even after the post-reach notice effect is executed, and after that, it develops into a super reach effect. In the illustrated example, a super reach development effect in which a female character appears in a car is executed. In the upper left corner position of the screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“3” − “being changed” − “3”).

  In FIG. 69 (J): An effect of stopping the car is executed, a female character appears from the car, and an effect of producing the line “I am my opponent !!” is executed.

  In FIG. 69 (K): “Landing haunted” image appears on the left side of the screen, “Female character” image appears on the right side of the screen, and “VS” character image appears on the center of the screen. The production that appears. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the super reach production will start.

  In FIG. 69 (L): For example, an effect is performed in which “Lantern Haunted” opens its mouth and delivers the “Kittsuki” technique. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[Chance up production]
A chance-up effect may be executed during the super reach effect. The chance-up effect is an effect that improves the degree of expectation of the big hit. Specifically, an effect in which a hermit character appears in the lower left of the screen is executed.

  In FIG. 70 (M): This time, a “female character” takes out a fan (weapon), and the fan fights “Lantern Haunted”.

[Continuation of opportunity improvement]
Here, the chance-up effect is continuously executed. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “This change is”.

  In FIG. 70, (N): Then, “Land Lantern Haunted” delivers a special technique that makes a long tongue pop out of the mouth, and the “female character” welcomes the special technique with a fan. If the “female character” wins in this state, it will be a win. Therefore, this aspect is the final stage of the super reach production and is the most exciting part as a game. For this reason, a cut-in notice or a helper appearance notice that another “female character” may help at the same time may be performed simultaneously in this scene.

[Continuation of opportunity improvement]
And here again, the chance-up effect is continuously executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the hermit character utters the phrase “Chance is”.

[Direction at the time of winning]
In FIG. 70, (O): “Woman character” is displayed large together with “Victory!” And “Lantern ghost” is displayed small, meaning that it is a win (winning). At the upper left corner position of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("3"-"3"-"3"). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the first special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also displayed in a variable manner.

  In the case of non-winning (outside), “Land Lantern Haunted” is displayed along with the letters “Defeat ・ ・”, “Woman Character” is displayed small, and the production pattern is reduced in the upper left corner of the screen. The stop display effect is executed in the state (for example, “3”-“4”-“3”).

  In FIG. 71 (P): Then, an effect is produced in which the “female character” pushes up one arm upward and emits the line “Iccho Arigato!”. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel the reverberation that “I won the lantern ghost”, and to improve the player's satisfaction. At this point in time, all the effect symbols arranged in a three-way manner are displayed to oscillate to the left and right, and the variation of the effect symbols has not completely stopped. At this time, the first special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 71 (Q): On the screen, an effect of re-entering the car on which the female character has ridden is executed. Here again, the variation of the effect symbol is not completely stopped, the first special symbol is in a state of variation, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also variably displayed.

  In FIG. 71, (R): In the illustrated example, an effect is performed in which a female character gets into a car, the car departs vigorously, and disappears to the left of the screen. At this time, smoke appears from the rear of the car, and the letters “re-lottery” are displayed in the smoke. Thereby, it can be communicated to the player that a re-lottery effect will be executed. Here again, the variation of the effect symbol is not completely stopped, the first special symbol is in a state of variation, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also variably displayed.

[Re-lottery production]
In FIG. 72 (S): When three production symbols are arranged, it is confirmed that there is a big hit, but a re-lottery production that finally transmits the type of the big hit game is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, character information of “re-lottery” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. Thus, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a re-lottery effect will be started from now on and may change from “3 effect symbols” to “other effect symbols”.

  In FIG. 72 (T): the effect pattern in which the three lined effect symbols are displayed gradually smaller and the effect line in which the three lined effect symbols are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating is executed.

  In FIG. 72 (U): The three effect symbols become so small that they are hardly visible. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Re-draw lotion failure production]
In FIG. 72, (V): When the re-lottery effect fails, that is, when it corresponds to the 9 round big hit (for example, “9 round symbol 2”), the re-lottery failure effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. In this case, however, the number of the production symbol is not changed (it remains “3”).

  In FIG. 72 (W): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to 9 round big hit (for example, “9 round symbol 2”). After that, the big hit effect corresponding to the ninth round big hit is executed.

[Re-draw lottery success production]
72 (X): On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is successful, that is, when it corresponds to the 16 round big hit (“16 round symbols”), the re-lottery successful effect is executed. In this case, the effect that the movable body 40f falls is triggered by the pressing of the effect switching button 45.

  In FIG. 72 (Y): An expected profit transmission effect is executed during the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. In the expected profit transmission effect, the effect symbol is replaced with the expected profit transmission symbol. The expected profit transmission pattern is a production pattern that transmits the expected profit (estimated value according to the expected performance) obtained by the jackpot game. Specifically, the numerical information “2700” is included in the text information of “Holiday”. It has been added. Then, the expected profit transmission symbols are displayed in a group of three in a state where they are finally stopped without shaking. In other words, the expected profit transmission effect is that the normal effect design is temporarily stopped in the winning mode ("3"-"3"-"3"), and then the temporarily stopped effect design is replaced with the expected profit transfer design, It is executed as a content for transmitting an estimated value according to the result when a game is played during the execution of the big hit game. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the 16 round big hit (“16 round symbol”). After this, the big hit effect corresponding to the 16 round big hit is executed.

  Further, “2700” is a display of the margin excess expected profit. The expected profit exceeding the limit is the expected marginal profit (profit for 16 rounds) expected as a result when the 16-round jackpot game is performed, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device during the jackpot game. This is a profit obtained by adding an accompanying profit (a profit obtained by winning the other hole) that is expected to be obtained based on the entrance of the normal winning opening 24 generated by the game ball flowing down around 31.

[Examples of production during a major role in the case of “9 round symbols 1”, etc.]
FIG. 73 to FIG. 76 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the effect of the big role production in the case of “9 round symbol 1” or “9 round symbol 2”.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the big role effect, and when it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”, the friend An effect in which the character wins the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Round 1]
FIG. 73 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect of the big game is started. In the example shown in the figure, a ghost image of an umbrella that is an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, a female character image that is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle effect will be started.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. In the second round of the big hit game, the same effect as the first round is executed.

[3rd round]
(B) in FIG. 73: When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is given in which the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised to run away from the ghost of the umbrella and escapes to the right side of the screen.

[Round 4]
(C) in FIG. 73: When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, a female character takes out a round fan (weapon), and an effect is shown in which a flame (aura) appears.

[5th round]
In FIG. 73 (D): And in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the ghost of the umbrella gives out a special technique that makes the long tongue pop out from the mouth, and the female character greets the special technique with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "9 round symbol 1", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "9 round symbol 2" Yes.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 1 symbol)]
In FIG. 74 (E): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, a defeat effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production).
In addition, in the sixth round in the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, the first variable winning device 30 is opened four times, but since the opening time is set extremely short, almost no profit is gained by playing. .

[7th round (when 9 symbols are selected for 9th round)]
In FIG. 74 (F): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 1, a re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Next is not defeated!”. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big hit again. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the jackpot game, a re-challenge promotion effect similar to the seventh round is executed. In addition, from the 7th to the 9th round when winning in the 9th round symbol 1, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short, so the profit from the game Can hardly be obtained. Further, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 74 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the 9-round symbol 1 ends (during the end processing), the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 75 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in the 9-round symbol 2, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).
In addition, in the sixth round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the first variable winning device 30 is opened four times, but since the opening time is set to be extremely short, there is almost no profit due to the game. .

[7th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 75 (I): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge is successful, you will enter a fireworks rush that is in a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. Also, in the 7th round when winning with 9 round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds open), so it is the same as the previous round You can get a profit by playing. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 9th round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball becomes the probability variation area blade member 31 d. To pass through the probability variation area.

  In FIG. 75 (J): When the player continues to make a right strike, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. However, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the second variable prize-winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short, so the profit from the game Can hardly be obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 75 (K): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  The above is an example of an effect when the game ball passes the probability variation area safely corresponding to “9 round symbol 2”, but the game ball passes the probability variation region even if it corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. If it does not, it will be the following production example.

[6th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 76 (L): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).

[7th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 76 (M): In the case of winning in the 9th round symbol 2, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh round. If this challenge is successful, you will enter a fireworks rush that is in a “high probability time reduction state”. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th round when winning in the 9 round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is opened once and the opening time is set long (29 seconds). Profits from launching can be obtained. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is activated in the seventh round when winning the 9th round symbol 2, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball becomes the probability variation area blade member 31 d. To pass through the probability variation area.

  However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the seventh round for some reason (not hitting right, clogged with a ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[8th round (9 rounds when winning 2 symbols)]
In FIG. 76, (N): In this case, a failure effect is produced in which the panda character utters the line “sorry”. Note that the same failure effect as in the eighth round is executed in the ninth round of the jackpot game. In addition, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning in the 9th round symbol 2, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set to be extremely short. Can hardly be obtained. In the eighth and ninth rounds, even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 76, (O): At the timing when the big hit game in the 9-round symbol 2 ends (during end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 77 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush corresponds to a big hit of “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol”, and is a mode that is shifted after the big hit game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game. The fireworks rush is a state of high probability time reduction, and is a chance zone that continues until the special symbol fluctuates 170 times after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 77 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “fireworks rush”. In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of fireworks rush, the game proceeds with a right hit, so the game ball enters the sorting device 200 arranged in the right hit area. In the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. In the fireworks rush, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are not opened unless the jackpot is hit, so that the game balls are collected as they are at the out port 32.

  In FIG. 77 (B): Since the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the route on the left side. In this case, the game ball basically enters the normal winning opening 24, and the player can obtain a prescribed prize ball (ten prize balls for 10 balls).

  (C) in FIG. 77: When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. In the illustrated example, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol is shown. However, in the high probability time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency. As long as the player continues to make a right turn, the variation display of the second and subsequent times after the end of the big hit game is often performed with the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. In the fireworks rush, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are not opened unless the jackpot is hit, so that the game balls are collected as they are at the out port 32.

78 to 81 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when winning or losing in the fireworks rush.
The following effect examples are effect examples that are executed when the fireworks rush corresponds to a big hit of “16 round symbols” or when the outlier reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 78, (A): The effect symbols are displayed in a “fireworks rush” state. In the example shown in the drawing, a background image expressing “a scene where a female character is watching fireworks” is displayed together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 varies. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 78 (B): For example, an effect is performed in which a female character utters the line “Game! By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. In addition, from this point of time, in order to display the effect of making the ally character and the enemy character play against each other on the screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”). -"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  78 (C): For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 79 (D): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  (E) in FIG. 79: This time, a female character takes out a drum (weapon), and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the drum is performed. In this effect example, an effect of fighting an enemy character using a drum is executed, but an effect of fighting an enemy character using a fan, for example, can also be executed. Thus, the expectation degree of jackpot can be changed by changing the weapon used for a battle.

  FIG. 79 (F): Then, an effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum toward the panda character.

  In FIG. 80 (G): Following this, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, it will be a big hit.

[When disconnected]
In FIG. 80 (H): When the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect is performed in which the panda character successfully avoids the wave fired from the drum.

  In FIG. 80, (I): A panda character is displayed in a large size together with a character “defeated...” And a female character is displayed in a small size. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  In FIG. 80 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  After this, since the fireworks rush continues, the player will aim for the next big hit during the fireworks rush. However, when the current variation is the final variation in the fireworks rush (the 170th variation after the big hit game is over), the fireworks rush is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode in the low probability non-time shortened state.

[When winning 16 rounds of big hit]
In FIG. 80 (K): On the other hand, if this special symbol variation hits 16 rounds of a big hit, the panda character will wave, causing an explosion that will cause the panda character to fly away. Production is performed.

  In FIG. 80 (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  In FIG. 80 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion promotion]
In FIG. 81 (N): If there are three production symbols during the variation of the second special symbol, it is confirmed that it is easy to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit and the big hit, but in the big hit game Promotional effects that affect the magnitude of the profit (outgoing ball) obtained in this way are executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. As a result, a re-drawing effect will be started for the player, and a sense of expectation will be given as to whether the “2 production symbol” will become the “3 production symbol” or the “celebration production symbol”. Can do.

  In FIG. 81, (O): the effect symbols that are arranged in three are displayed gradually smaller, and the effect that the effect symbols that are arranged in three are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating.

  In FIG. 81 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they are hardly visible. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Weak promotion production]
In FIG. 81, (Q): a weak promotion effect is executed in the case of 9 big hits (for example, “9 round symbol 2”). In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. , “2 effect design” is changed to “3 effect design”.

  In FIG. 81 (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. In addition, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the 9 round big hit (for example, “9 round symbol 2”). After that, the big hit effect corresponding to the ninth round big hit is executed.

[Strong promotion production]
In FIG. 81 (S): On the other hand, in the case of 16 rounds big hit (“16 round symbols”), a strong promotion effect is executed. In this case, the effect that the movable body 40f falls is triggered by the pressing of the effect switching button 45.

  In FIG. 81 (T): An expected profit transmission effect is executed during the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. In the expected profit transmission effect, the effect symbol is replaced with the expected profit transmission symbol. Then, the expected profit transmission symbols are displayed in a group of three in a state where they are finally stopped without shaking. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the 16 round big hit (“16 round symbol”). After this, the big hit effect corresponding to the 16 round big hit is executed.

[Expected profit transmission pattern]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing another variation of the expected profit transmission pattern.
The expected profit transmission symbol is composed of “celebration” character information and numerical information arranged below the character information. The role of numerical information basically indicates the expected profit obtained by 16 round jackpots. For this reason, when the expected profit transmission symbol to which the character information of “2700” is added is displayed, it means that “about 2700” game balls can be obtained by 16 rounds of big hit. .

  This is the basic structure, but fortunately when 16 rounds of big hits occur consecutively (for example, when holding consecutively in a hold), the profits obtained from a plurality of special games executed continuously are added up. The combined expected profit (the first expected profit expected as the result when the first special game is played, plus the second expected profit expected as the result when the next special game is performed) Communicated. For example, if approximately 16 rounds of big hits occur twice, “about 5400 (= 2700 × 2)” game balls can be obtained, and if generated consecutively 3 times, “about 8100 (= 2700). X3) "to acquire a game ball is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined that 16 rounds of big hit will occur twice in succession as a result of prefetching, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), “5400” is added to the character information of “Holiday”. The expected profit transmission pattern with numerical information added is displayed at the time of first winning.

  As a result of the prefetching, if it is determined that 16 rounds of big hit will occur three times in succession, as shown in FIG. The expected profit transmission pattern with information added is displayed at the time of the first winning.

  Further, as a result of the pre-reading, when it is determined that the small hit occurs once after the 16 round big hit, as shown in (C) of FIG. 82, “2715” is added to the character information of “Holiday”. The expected profit transmission pattern with numerical information added is displayed at the time of first winning. In addition, when the small hit of 1.8 seconds and 1 time is adopted, the maximum expected profit that can be obtained is 45 (= 3 × 15) of 3 ball winnings, but the lowest 1 ball is about to enter Then, the estimated value is “2715” obtained by adding “15” to “2700”.

[Director during big role]
FIG. 83 to FIG. 86 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the big role effect executed during the big hit game in the case of “16 round symbols”.

[1 round]
FIG. 83 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (in this case, a celebration symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the celebration effect symbol”. In addition, a character “Special Bonus” is displayed in the left area of the display screen, and an image of a female character performing a peace sign across a horse is displayed in the center of the screen.

[Expected profit transmission effect]
Also, the expected profit that conveys the expected profit as the actual result when the jackpot game is played to the end at the start of the jackpot game or at a specific unit game among a plurality of unit games repeated by the jackpot game A transmission effect is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect in which a female character utters the line “MAX2700” is executed. By this expected profit transmission effect, it is possible to inform the player that approximately 2700 prize balls can be obtained through this big hit game.

[Point production]
Furthermore, in the lower left position in the screen, a game ball is placed on the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first big winning port or the second big winning port) during the big hit in the case of 16 round symbols. The total number of game balls paid out by the payout control device 92 by entering the ball is displayed as payout points (reference number P1).

  On the other hand, in the upper right position in the screen, the total number of game balls paid out by the payout control device 92 when the game balls enter the normal winning opening 24 during the big hit in the case of 16 round symbols is paid out. It is displayed as a point (reference symbol P2).

  In the illustrated example, since “00000 pt” is displayed as the payout point P1, it is expressed that no winning ball has been obtained by the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at this time. . Further, since “000 pt” is displayed as the payout point P2, it is expressed that no winning ball is currently obtained by the normal winning opening 24. Thereafter, when game balls enter the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning port 24, the numerical values of the payout points P1 and P2 gradually increase.

  Further, in the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. The game balls distributed to the right route enter the open first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31.

[2 rounds]
In FIG. 83 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. For example, in the role-playing effect, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND2” is displayed on the screen, and images of horse characters and dog characters corresponding to the special bonus are displayed.

[Point production]
As the payout point P1, character information “00150pt” is displayed. This indicates that 150 game balls have been paid out by entering the big winning opening (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening) by this time.
On the other hand, the character information “020 pt” is displayed as the payout point P2. This represents that 20 game balls have been paid out by entering the normal winning opening 24 by this time. With such display modes of the payout points P1 and P2, it is possible to convey to the player that “the profit is being steadily obtained” and to improve the willingness to obtain further profit.

  In the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the route on the left side. In this case, the game ball basically enters the normal winning opening 24, and the player can obtain a prescribed prize ball (ten prize balls for 10 balls).

[7 rounds]
83 (C): In the case of winning with a 16-round symbol, a fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the seventh to ninth rounds. If this challenge production is successful, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state of high probability reduction. Specifically, an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters a line such as “Aim at V Attacker!”. Thereby, the game nature of aiming at the second variable winning device 31 can be transmitted to the player. In addition, in the 7th to 9th rounds when winning with a 16-round symbol, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but since the opening time is set long (29 seconds), so far As with the round, you can get a profit from the game. Further, since the probability variation area solenoid 99 is operated in the seventh to ninth rounds when winning the 16-round symbol, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is used for the probability variation area. It is guided by the blade member 31d and passes through the probability variation region.

[Point production]
As the payout point P1, character information “00900pt” is displayed. This represents that 900 game balls have been paid out by entering the big winning opening (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening) so far.
On the other hand, the character information “120 pt” is displayed as the payout point P2. This represents that 120 game balls have been paid out by entering the normal winning opening 24 up to this point.

  Further, in the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. The game balls distributed to the right route enter the open second variable winning device 31.

  In FIG. 84 (D): When the player continues to make a right strike and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the female character jumps up and appears on the left side of the screen. A blessing effect in which the V mark is displayed is executed. In the eighth and ninth rounds of the big hit game, the same blessing effect as the seventh round is executed. In addition, in the 8th and 9th rounds when winning with a 16-round symbol, the second variable winning device 31 is released once, but the opening time is set as long (29 seconds) as in the 7th round. Therefore, as with previous rounds, profits can be gained by playing. In addition, when the 16-round symbol is won, the probability variation area solenoid 99 is also activated for the 8th and 9th rounds. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable prize winning device 31, the game ball is surely changed. It is guided by the region blade member 31d and passes through the probability variation region. However, the probability variation area only needs to pass the game ball even once during the big hit game, and if the game ball has already passed the probability variation area in the seventh round, the subsequent passage is not particularly meaningful.

[Point production]
As the payout point P1, character information “00930pt” is displayed. This represents that 930 game balls have been paid out by entering the big winning opening (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening) by this time.
On the other hand, the character information “120 pt” is displayed as the payout point P2. This represents that 120 game balls have been paid out by entering the normal winning opening 24 up to this point.

  Further, in the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. The game balls distributed to the right route enter the open second variable winning device 31.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 84 (E): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned celebration effect symbol as the “left eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[Point production]
Character information “02400pt” is displayed as the payout point P1. This represents that 2400 game balls have been paid out by entering the big winning opening (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening) by this time.
On the other hand, the character information “320 pt” is displayed as the payout point P2. This indicates that 320 game balls have been paid out by entering the normal winning opening 24 up to this point.

  In the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the route on the left side. In this case, the game ball basically enters the normal winning opening 24, and the player can obtain a prescribed prize ball (ten prize balls for 10 balls).

[At the end of a major role (total profit display effect)]
84 (F): The combined profit display effect is executed at the timing (for example, during the end time) when the big hit game ends. The combined profit display effect is an effect of displaying the combined profit obtained by adding together the value of the profit at the big winning opening and the value of the profit at the normal winning opening 24 at the end of the big hit game.
The combined profit display effect will be described in more detail. For example, during the execution of the jackpot game, each winning prize gain obtained according to each game ball entering the winning prize one by one is accumulated, The first number image (for example, payout point P1) according to the accumulation can be displayed, and each normal winning obtained in response to each game ball entering the normal winning opening 24 one by one during execution of the big hit game. The unit profit is integrated, and a second numerical image (for example, a payout point P2) corresponding to the integration or indicating that the integration is being executed can be displayed. And the combined profit display effect is a big prize opening during the execution of a big hit game including a specific round time among a plurality of unit games repeated by the big hit game, or when transitioning from a big hit game to the next big hit game This is an effect of displaying the combined profit obtained by adding up the integrated value of the profit and the integrated value of the ordinary winning opening profit.
In the illustrated example, the character information of “total time” is displayed at the top, the payout point P1 is displayed at the lower left, and the payout point P2 is displayed at the lower right.

  In FIG. 85 (G): An effect is performed in which two animal characters insert two payout points P1, P2 into the treasure box.

  (H) in FIG. 85: Following this, the treasure chest lid is closed, and an effect is performed in which two animal characters stare at the treasure chest.

  In FIG. 85 (I): The treasure box cover is opened, and a total payout point P3 in which the value of the payout point P1 and the value of the payout point P2 are added is displayed. In the illustrated example, an effect is displayed in which character information of “total 2720pt” is displayed in the balloon image. Thereby, the player can grasp the total payout points of the big winning opening and the normal winning opening 24 obtained during the big hit game.

[Transition display effect]
86 (J): Next, a transition display effect relating to the payout point P2 is executed. The transition display effect is an effect that displays a transition of profits at the normal winning opening 24 caused by a game ball flowing down around the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the end of the big hit game. is there. In the example shown in the figure, the character information of “other hole count transition” is displayed in the upper part, and three female characters are displayed in the lower part.

[Transition display effect]
In FIG. 86 (K): When the transition display effect progresses, the number of balls entered in the normal winning opening 24 for each round is displayed in a graph. In the example shown in the figure, a female character uttering the line “Result is announced!” Is displayed, and a line graph is displayed. In this graph, the vertical axis indicates the number of balls entered into the normal winning opening 24, and the horizontal axis indicates the number of rounds. From this graph, it can be seen that, for example, in the first round, two game balls have entered the normal winning opening 24.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 86 (L): When the transition display effect is finished, the major role finish effect with the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be stably entered into the normal winning opening 24 when hitting right during a big hit. Game balls can be released beyond the limit of the balls (16R × 10 counts × 15 prize balls = 2400 balls). In the above point effect, the points are calculated on the assumption that approximately two game balls enter the normal winning opening 24 during one round.

[Examples of production during a fireworks rush in a recreational resort]
FIG. 87 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect during a fireworks rush.
When a winning result is obtained by an internal lottery in a special section (1st to 4th fluctuations) in the fireworks rush, a special effect at the time of a reserved resort is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  87 (A): For example, the first variation display is performed after the end of the 16 round big hit game, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “special section in fireworks rush”. In the special section of the fireworks rush, in order to tell the player that the fireworks rush will start from now on, the explanation screen “Fireworks rush rush” displayed at the end of the jackpot game is displayed as it is . The effect design is variably displayed in a reduced state at the upper left corner of the screen. Further, since the first non-winning variation is set to an extremely short variation time, all effect symbols are immediately stopped and displayed ("1"-"2"-"4").

  87 (B): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game is finished. In the example shown in the figure, the explanation screen “Fireworks rush rush” is continuously displayed. The effect design is variably displayed in a reduced state at the upper left corner of the screen. Further, since the second non-winning variation is set to an extremely short variation time, all effect symbols are immediately stopped and displayed ("2"-"5"-"6").

  In FIG. 87 (C): Here, it is assumed that the third round after the big hit game ends again corresponds to the big hit of “16 round symbols”. In this case, the current variation is a winning variation, but the winning variation of the third variation after the big hit game when passing through the big hit of “16 round symbols” is set to an extremely short variation time. And here, the effect that the movable body 40f falls is executed.

  87 (D): After the effect that the movable body 40f falls, during the display of the variation of the second special symbol, the expected profit transmission symbol replaced with the normal effect symbol is displayed in an obliquely aligned manner. .

  87 (E): Then, during the stop display of the second special symbol, a stop display effect in which the expected profit transmission symbol is completely stopped is executed. After this, the big hit effect corresponding to the 16 round big hit is executed.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. In this coast mode, the game ball passes through the probability change area after the jackpot game when “9 round symbol 1” is met or during the jackpot game of “9 round symbol 2” or “16 round symbol” In this case, the mode is shifted to after the end of the big hit game. The coast mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  88 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “9 round symbol 1” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the effect symbol variation display is performed in the “coast mode” state. Yes. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In the present embodiment, in the coast mode state, the game progresses by right-handed, so the game ball enters the sorting device 200 disposed in the right-handed region. In the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. In the coast mode, since the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not open unless the jackpot is hit, the game balls are collected as they are at the outlet 32.

  88 (B): Since the current variation (at the time of non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the route on the left side. In this case, the game ball basically enters the normal winning opening 24, and the player can obtain a prescribed prize ball (ten prize balls for 10 balls).

  (C) in FIG. 88: The next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

  Further, in the illustrated example, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 200 are distributed to the right route. In the coast mode, since the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not open unless the jackpot is hit, the game balls are collected as they are at the outlet 32.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach effect, memory number display effect, big role effect, expected profit transmission effect, big prize profit display effect, predetermined prize return profit display effect, combined profit display effect, transition display Production and the like are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a probability variation area passing command, a prize ball content command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the contents of the production. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 89).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 35) or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 35). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a 9-round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 9-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 89) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 89). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S611: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect symbol management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an expected profit transmission effect that transmits an expected profit that is expected to be obtained by the big hit game during the special symbol variation display or stop display (expected profit transmission). Production execution means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the type of expected profit transmission symbol used when “16 round symbol” is won. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When one of the processes of step S608, step S611, and step S612 described above is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 64B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process. In addition, when the stay mode is “fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 77A) having fireworks as a motif. Run. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortening state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 88A) with the coast as a motif. Run.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 91), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Special production design management processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special effect symbol management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S630: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S632. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to the “16 round symbol” (No), the process returns to the pre-processing for effect symbol variation (FIG. 92).

  Step S632: The effect control CPU 126 executes an in-memory extended game determination process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and if so, how many winning types exist. Execute. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S634: The effect control CPU 126 executes a numerical image selection process. Specifically, based on the determination result in the storage range determination process executed in step S632, a process of selecting a number image to be added to the expected profit transmission symbol is executed. For example, if it is determined in the stored range resort determination process that the stored range resort is not to be performed, a process of selecting a numeric image “2700” is executed. If it is determined that there is one “16 round big hit” in the storage in the storage range determination process, a process of selecting a number image of “5400” is executed. Furthermore, when it is determined in the storage range determination process that there is one “small hit” in the storage, a process of selecting the number image “2715” is executed. The expected profit information related to such a numerical value is stored in advance in the ROM 128 in association with the winning result as information related to the expected profit that is expected as a result when a game is played during the big hit game or the small hit game. The effect control CPU 126 determines the image of the numerical information to be added to the “celebration” image while referring to the expected profit information corresponding to the winning result (expected profit information storage means).

  Step S636: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect symbol effect pattern selection process. Specifically, an effect pattern (in FIG. 72 (Y), FIG. 81 (T), and FIG. 87 (D) (E)) in which a normal effect symbol is replaced with an expected profit transmission symbol in a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect. Etc.) is executed.

  Then, when the process of step S636 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 92).

[Remembrance judgment process in memory]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the in-store extended resort determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S640: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a winning variation pattern exists in the memory of the lottery element of the second special symbol. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm whether or not the winning variation pattern exists by confirming the variation pattern destination determination command. The winning variation pattern includes a big hit variation pattern and a small hit variation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning variation pattern exists in the memory of the lottery element of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S642. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the winning variation pattern exists in the memory of the lottery element of the second special symbol (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect symbol management process (FIG. 93).

  Step S642: The effect control CPU 126 executes a winning type determination process. The type of winning symbol can be confirmed by a change pattern destination determination command. The determination result of the winning type is stored in the RAM 130, for example.

Step S644: The effect control CPU 126 executes a winning number determination process. The number of winning times can be confirmed by how many variation pattern destination determination commands corresponding to winning are stored. The determination result of the number of winning times is stored in the RAM 130, for example. Thereby, it can be confirmed how many winning types exist in the memory of the lottery element of the second special symbol.
Then, when the process of step S644 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special effect symbol management process (FIG. 93).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S804. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is a special section. The special section is from the first change to the fourth change when shifting to the high probability time shortening state. In addition, whether it is a special section can be confirmed by counting the number of fluctuations after the transition to the high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that it is a special section (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S806, and when it is confirmed that it is a special section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S808.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S810. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S812. Run.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS. 78 to 81 and the like is executed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes special section big hit effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect corresponding to the special section. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in (C) in FIG.

  Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a reach effect is executed in the coast mode, and a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit is executed.

  Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG.

  Then, after finishing any one of steps S806 to S812, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 92).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S854. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is a special section. The special section is from the first change to the fourth change when shifting to the high probability time shortening state. In addition, whether it is a special section can be confirmed by counting the number of fluctuations after the transition to the high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that it is a special section (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856, and when it is confirmed that it is a special section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S860. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S862. Run.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of fireworks rush failure. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIGS. 73 to 80 and the like is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the special section is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of loss corresponding to the special section. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in (A) and (B) of FIG.

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the coast mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 88 and the like is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 64 and the like is executed.

  Then, after finishing any one of steps S856 to S862, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 92).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operation process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operation in-process (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning with “9 round symbol 1”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning with “9 round symbol 2”, a process of selecting an effect in which the teammate character wins the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning with “16 round symbols”, processing for selecting a special bonus effect is executed.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result is monitored. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146. Further, in this variable winning device operating process, if a probability change area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (an effect shown in (J) in FIG. 75) is selected. On the other hand, if the probability change area passing command is not received during the big hit game while the process is executed, an effect indicating that no V winning has occurred (in FIG. 74 (F), FIG. 76 (N), etc.) The process which selects the production to show) is performed.

  Step S908: In the variable winning device post-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transfer destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes the coast mode rush effect or the fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not the winning symbol or the probability variation area has passed. Specifically, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (K) in FIG. 75) indicating that the fireworks rush is entered is executed. When the probability variation area passing command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in FIG. 74 (G), etc.) indicating entering the coast mode is executed.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the pre-operation of the variable prize winning device. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”. The winning symbol can be confirmed with a jackpot type command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S914, and the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 1”. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S916, and the current winning symbol corresponds to “9 round symbol 2”. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a defeat effect selection process. Specifically, the process which selects the production which a teammate character loses by battle production is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (E), (F), etc. in FIGS.

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a victory effect selection process. Specifically, the process which selects the production which a friend character wins by battle production is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (H) in FIGS.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special bonus effect selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect for executing a special jackpot effect without executing the battle effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (D) and (E) in FIGS. 83 and 84.

  Step S919: The effect control CPU 126 executes a probable expected profit transmission effect management process (expected profit transfer effect executing means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect that transmits the expected profit that would be obtained by the jackpot at the start of the jackpot game. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  And after finishing the process of step S914, step S916, or step S919, presentation control CPU126 returns to the process at the time of variable prize-device operation | movement (FIG. 97).

[Superior expected profit transmission effect management process]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-mentioned prominent expected profit transmission effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S732: The effect control CPU 126 executes an in-memory extended game determination process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and if so, how many winning types exist. Execute. In addition, about the content of a specific process, since it is the same as that of step S632 of a special effect symbol management process (FIG. 93), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Step S734: The effect control CPU 126 executes a numeric image selection process. Specifically, based on the determination result in the storage range determination process executed in the previous step S732, a process of selecting a number image to be added to the expected profit transmission symbol is executed. For example, if it is determined in the stored range resort determination process that the stored range resort is not to be performed, a process of selecting a numeric image “2700” is executed. If it is determined that there is one “16 round big hit” in the storage in the storage range determination process, a process of selecting a number image of “5400” is executed. Furthermore, when it is determined in the storage range determination process that there is one “small hit” in the storage, a process of selecting the number image “2715” is executed. Predictive profit information regarding such numerical values is stored in advance in the ROM 128, and the effect control CPU 126 determines an image of numerical information while referring to the predicted profit information. In addition, a display such as “2700” is a display of a margin excess expected profit. Expected profit exceeding the limit is the expected marginal profit (profit for 16 rounds) expected as the result when the 16-round jackpot game is played to the end, and the normal winning opening as the result when the jackpot game is played to the end This is a profit including an incidental profit expected to be obtained by 24 (a profit obtained by winning the other hole).

  Step S736: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process at the start of an active role. Specifically, based on the numerical information determined in the previous step S734, a process of selecting a dialogue image (see (A) in FIG. 83) issued by the female character is executed. By executing such processing, in the example of (A) in FIG. 83, the effect that the female character utters the line “MAX2700” is executed. An effect that produces a line such as "" will be executed.

  Then, when the process of step S736 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operation pre-process (FIG. 98).

[Processing during variable winning system operation]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable winning device operating process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a V prize related effect. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a probability variation area passing command has been received in a specific round (probability variation round). When it is determined that the probability variation area passing command has been received, a process of selecting an effect (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 75J) for transmitting to the player that a V prize has occurred is executed. When it is determined that the probability variation area passing command has not been received, a process of selecting an effect (for example, an effect shown in (N) in FIG. 76) that conveys to the player that no V winning has occurred. Execute.

  Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes a point effect management process. This process is executed, for example, during a big hit game with 16 round symbols. The effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that teaches the number of points by the payout points P1, P2 based on the prize ball content command. Specifically, when the production control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the first profit (a command indicating that a game ball has entered the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31). The effect pattern which increases the number of payout points P1 by 15 points is selected. In addition, when the effect control CPU 126 receives a prize ball instruction command corresponding to the second profit (a command indicating that a game ball has entered the normal winning slot 24), the number of payout points P2 is increased by 10 points. Select a production pattern.

The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of updating the total number of points in the point effect management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of increasing the total number of points stored in the RAM 150 in accordance with the executed point increase effect (according to the increased number of points of the payout points P1 and P2). Run. The initial value of the total number of points is “0”, and may be reset when the special bonus effect ends, or may be retained without being reset until the time reduction state ends thereafter.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 97).

[Point production management processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the point effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols”. The winning symbol can be confirmed with a jackpot type command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S932 to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols”. When the confirmation cannot be made (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 100).

  Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a prize ball content command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a prize ball content command is stored.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the prize ball content command is stored (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S934 and when it is not possible to confirm that the prize ball content command is saved (No), the production The control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 100).

  Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the first profit.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the first profit (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S936, and the content of the prize ball content command corresponds to the first profit. When it is not possible to confirm that it is to be performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S940.

  Step S936: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first increase effect pattern selection process (a special winning opening profit display effect executing means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 pays out the winning points profit obtained by the game balls entering the first winning prize opening or the second winning opening during the execution of the big hit game. The special winning opening profit display effect displayed by the numerical image) is executed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that increases the number of payout points P1 by 15 points.

  Step S938: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big winning opening total point number update process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of adding “15” to the first point variable that stores the total prize winning points stored in the RAM 130. The initial value of the first point variable is “0”, and may be reset when the special bonus effect ends, or may be retained without being reset until the time reduction state ends thereafter. .

  Step S940: The effect control CPU 126 executes a second increase effect pattern selection process (predetermined winning opening profit display effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 separates the predetermined winning opening profit obtained by the game ball entering the normal winning opening 24 from the payout point P1 (first numerical image) during execution of the big hit game. The predetermined winning opening profit display effect displayed by the payout point P2 (second numerical image) is executed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that increases the number of payout points P2 by 10 points.

  Step S942: The effect control CPU 126 executes the other hole winning opening total point number update process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of adding “10” to the second point variable storing the other hole winning opening total points stored in the RAM 130. The initial value of the second point variable is “0”, and may be reset when the special bonus effect ends, or may be retained without being reset until the time reduction state ends thereafter. .

Step S944: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of incrementing the round counter. Round counters are prepared for 1 round to 16 rounds, such as for 1 round, 2 rounds, and 3 rounds. Then, when receiving the prize ball instruction command corresponding to the second profit, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of incrementing the counter corresponding to the current round. For example, when the current round is the first round, a process of incrementing a round-specific counter for one round is executed. Thereby, it is possible to memorize how many times the game ball has entered the normal winning opening 24 in each round.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 100).

[Post-processing of variable winning device]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for post-operation of the variable prize apparatus. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S950: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols”. The winning symbol can be confirmed with a jackpot type command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S952 to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbols”. When it cannot confirm (No), production control CPU126 performs step S956.

  Step S952: The effect control CPU 126 executes a total profit display effect selection process (total profit display effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect for displaying the payout point P3 by adding the payout point P1 and the payout point P2. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 calculates the value of the payout point P3 by adding the value of the first point variable and the value of the second point variable, as shown in FIG. 84 (F) and FIG. A process of selecting an effect is executed.

  Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 executes a transition display effect selection process (transition display effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of displaying a transition effect related to the normal winning opening 24. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting effects shown in (J) and (K) in FIG. 86 based on the round-specific counter set in the previous step S944.

  Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation area during the big hit game. Whether or not the vehicle can pass can be confirmed by a probability variation region passing command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the game ball has passed the probability variation area (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S958, and when it is not possible to confirm that the game ball has passed the probability variation area (No), the effect control CPU 126. Executes step S960.

  Step S958: The effect control CPU 126 executes a firework rush transition effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern on the transition screen to the fireworks rush. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (L) in FIG.

Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode transition effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern on the screen for transition to the coast mode. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect shown in (G) in FIG.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 97).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game, the payout point P1 corresponding to the big winning opening and the payout point P2 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24 are displayed separately. It is possible to clearly grasp what kind of profits are obtained by the big winning opening and the normal winning opening 24.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the profit obtained from the special winning opening and the profit obtained from the normal winning opening 24 are displayed as numerical images, it is possible to make the display mode intuitively understandable.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, since the payout point P3 obtained by adding up the value of the payout point P1 and the value of the payout point P2 is displayed, Can be given as if the payout point P1 has been added, and the player can grasp all the profits obtained through the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, the other hole count transition effect that displays the change of the payout point P2 is executed, so that the player can go to the normal winning opening 24 during the big hit game. It is possible to give an opportunity to look back on the entry situation of the game after the big hit game is over.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since the expected profit transmission effect is executed at the start of the big hit game, when the payout point P3 is displayed at the end of the big hit game, the display of the payout point P3 can be emphasized. When the total profit displayed by the payout point P3 is larger than the predicted profit transmitted by the predicted profit transmission effect, the player is satisfied that the expected profit can be exceeded. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, since the normal winning opening 24 is arranged around the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, it is possible to release the ball in one big hit game using the special electric game. Game balls can be released beyond the limit (16R × 10 counts × 15 prize balls = 2400 balls). And since an expected profit transmission effect is performed by the aspect which transmits a margin excess expected profit, a player's sense of expectation can be raised significantly.

  Furthermore, according to the board surface configuration of this embodiment, the route of the game ball can be stabilized by the sorting device 200, so that the game ball stably enters the normal winning port 24 or the big winning port. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the profit as intended in advance, improve the certainty when the expected profit is transmitted, and also frequently update the payout point P2 during the special game. can do.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example has been described in which the expected profit corresponding to the 16th round jackpot is transmitted as the predicted profit transmission effect, but the predicted profit corresponding to the 9th round jackpot may be transmitted. In addition, as a transmission method, the method of replacing the normal production design with the expected profit transmission design was adopted, but if the special design is changing or stopped, the method for transmitting and displaying the numerical value related to the expected profit separately. It may be adopted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the expected profit transmission effect may be executed in anticipation of the number of game balls (so-called over-winning number) that enter the special electric accessory more than the specified number. In this way, it is possible to execute an expected profit transmission effect that transmits more numbers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, the distribution device 200, and the normal winning port 24 are described as examples arranged in the right-handed region, but may be arranged in the left-handed region. Good.

  In the embodiment described above, an example of a gaming machine having a probability variation area has been described. However, a gaming machine having no probability variation area (a general probability variation machine having a normal winning symbol and a certain probability winning symbol) may be used. In this case, since the probability variation region switch 95 and the probability variation region solenoid 99 are not required, the probability variation region switch 95 is switched to the effect switch, and the probability variation region solenoid 99 is switched to the effect solenoid so that during the big hit game A specific effect (such as an effect suggesting a recreation area in memory) may be executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to emphasize the display of the payout point P3, the example has been described in which the payout point P3 is displayed at the end of the jackpot game after the expected profit transmission effect is once executed at the start of the jackpot game. The payout point P3 may be displayed together with the expected expected value at the end of the big hit game without executing the expected profit transmission effect at the start of the big hit game.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game relating to a game ball flow;
A symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time based on the execution of the predetermined lottery;
A variable winning device that is provided in a gaming area where a game ball flows down, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner, a special winning game is performed by opening a big winning opening;
A predetermined winning opening arranged around the variable winning device;
During the execution of the special game, a first increase effect relating to an increase in the profit of the big prize opening obtained by the game ball entering the big prize opening, and during the execution of the special game, the game ball is An increase production execution means for executing a second increase production related to an increase in the predetermined prize opening profit obtained by entering the winning opening of
During the execution of the special game, the respective winning prize profits obtained in response to the game balls entering the big prize opening are accumulated, and during the execution of the special game, the gaming balls receive the predetermined prize. Accumulate each predetermined winning award profit obtained each time a ball is entered into the mouth, and accumulating the large winning award profit during the execution of the special game or when shifting from the special game to the next game state A combined profit display effect executing means for executing a combined profit display effect for displaying the combined profit obtained by adding the value obtained and the accumulated value of the predetermined winning award profit,
The increase production execution means includes
Display corresponding to the first increase effect and the second increase effect can be displayed on one display screen, respectively.
The combined profit display effect executing means is:
As the combined profit display effect, when displaying the combined profit, the large winning opening profit obtained during the execution of the special game and the predetermined winning opening profit acquired during the execution of the special game are added together. A game machine characterized by executing an effect of deriving the combined profit. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A total profit storage means for storing the total profit;
The combined profit display effect executing means is:
When displaying the combined profit, the game machine is characterized in that an effect of deriving character information relating to the combined profit stored in the combined profit storage means is executed.